ASE

General Static Analysis of FE Structures

SOFiSTiK | 2025
 ASE
General Static Analysis of FE Structures

ASE Manual, Service Pack 2025-1.1 Build 3

Copyright © 2024 by SOFiSTiK AG, Nuremberg, Germany.

SOFiSTiK AG

HQ Nuremberg Office Garching

Flataustraße 14 Parkring 2
90411 Nürnberg 85748 Garching bei München
Germany Germany

T +49 (0)911 39901-0 T +49 (0)89 315878-0

F +49(0)911 397904 F +49 (0)89 315878-23
[email protected]
www.sofistik.com

This manual is protected by copyright laws. No part of it may be translated, copied or reproduced, in any form or by
any means, without written permission from SOFiSTiK AG. SOFiSTiK reserves the right to modify or to release
new editions of this manual.

The manual and the program have been thoroughly checked for errors. However, SOFiSTiK does not claim that
either one is completely error free. Errors and omissions are corrected as soon as they are detected.

The user of the program is solely responsible for the applications. We strongly encourage the user to test the
correctness of all calculations at least by random sampling.
 Contents | ASE

Contents

Contents i

1 Task Description 1-1

2 Theoretical Principles 2-1

2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 Implemented Elements - licence level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3 Beam Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3.1 Geometric nonlinear Theory 2nd and 3rd Order . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3.2 Coordinate System of Forces, Center of Gravity . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3.3 Warping torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.4 SOFiSTiK - T-Beam Philosophy centric (for buildings) . . . . . 2-6
2.3.5 T-Beam Philosophy excentric (for bridges) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4 Pile Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.1 Winkler Coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.4.2 Numerical Solution and Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
2.5 Truss and Cable Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
2.6 Spring Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2.7 Boundary Elements BOUN and FLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.8 Shell Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
2.8.1 Plate Structural Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.8.2 Membrane Structural Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.8.3 Elastic Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
2.8.4 Rotations around the Shell Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.8.5 Twisted Shell Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.8.6 Eccentrically Connected Shell Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.8.7 Tendons in QUAD Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.8.8 Non-conforming Formulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.9 Volume Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
2.10 Primary Load Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
2.11 Non-linear Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
2.12 Non-linear Analysis of Plates and Shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.12.2 Input of the Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2.12.3 Analysis Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2.12.4 Steel plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
2.12.5 Concrete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
2.12.6 Rounding off over Punching Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
2.12.7 Output of the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
2.12.8 Miscellaneous Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
2.13 Membrane Structures: Formfinding and Static Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

SOFiSTiK 2025 i
ASE | Contents

2.13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

2.13.2 The Membrane Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2.13.3 Formfinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
2.13.4 Static Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
2.13.5 Unstable Membrane Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
2.13.6 Calculations of Cable Meshes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
2.13.7 Check List - Notes - Problem Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
2.13.8 Overview about the Used Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
2.13.9 Literature on membranes and cutting pattern . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.13.10 Necessary Program Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.14 Active Bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.14.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2.14.2 Active Bending including a membrane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
2.14.3 Active Bending throw tent and spere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
2.14.4 Torsion case study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
2.14.5 Torsion on beam with fixed ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.14.6 No torsion in case of constant beam rotation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
2.14.7 Torsion caused by loading transverse to the main active bend-
ing plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
2.15 Dynamic Modal Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
2.16 Buckling Eigenvalues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90
2.17 Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.18 Damping Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.19 Modal Damping and Modal Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91
2.20 Dynamic analysis possibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

3 Input Description 3-1

3.1 Input Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Input Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.3 CTRL – Control of the Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.1 SOLV Equation solver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.3.2 CORE Parallel computation control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.3.3 ITER Iteration method for the elimination of residual forces . . 3-9
3.3.4 AFIX movable degrees of freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.3.5 SPRI Spring options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
3.3.6 CABL Cable handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.7 BEAM Beam element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.8 WARP Warping torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.9 BRIC Control for BRIC elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
3.3.10 QTYP Formulation of QUAD elements and tendons . . . . . . . 3-14
3.3.11 CONC Concrete in cracked condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.3.12 NLAY Number of layers for QUAD layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
3.3.13 ILAY Store stresses of inner layers for WINGRAF . . . . . . . . 3-17
3.3.14 FRIC Maximum allowable shear stress for the QUAD concrete
rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3.15 STII Linear beam stiffness factor in a nonlinear analysis . . . . 3-18
3.3.16 PLAB T-beam philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
3.3.17 INPL Inplane stiffnesses: Connecting beams to quads . . . . . 3-19
3.3.18 CANT cantilever construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

ii SOFiSTiK 2025
 Contents | ASE

3.3.19 FIXZ Global or local xy constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

3.3.20 STEA normal force stiffness component of beams . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3.21 QUEA EA part of the QUAD elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3.22 DIFF difference forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3.23 SOFT soft spring support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3.3.24 MCON Activation of a constant mass matrix . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.3.25 UNRE BEAM prestress from program TENDON . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.3.26 GIT non-linear torsional stiffness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.3.27 MSTE Runge-Kutta steps for non-linear material . . . . . . . . . 3-24
3.4 SYST – Global Control Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3.5 STEP – Time Step Method Dynamics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
3.6 HIST – Storage STEP-LCST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.7 ULTI – Limit Load Iteration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
3.8 PUSH – Push over analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
3.9 PLOT – Plot of a Limit Load Iteration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
3.10 CREP – Creep and Shrinkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
3.11 GRP – Group Selection Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.12 GRP2 – Expanded Group Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
3.13 Q8X8 – Quad 8x8 Stiffness Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
3.14 ELEM – Single Element Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
3.15 LEN0 – Unstressed Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
3.16 HIGH – Membrane High Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
3.17 TBEX – T-beam-philosophy on excentric beam elements . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
3.18 REIQ – Reinforcement in QUAD Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
3.19 STEX – External Stiffness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
3.20 OBLI – Inclination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
3.21 SLIP – SLIP Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
3.22 VOLU – Air Volume Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
3.23 MOVS – Moving Spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
3.24 LAUN – Incremental Launching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
3.25 SFIX – Fixing Stiffness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
3.26 FIXT – Temporary Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
3.27 ACTB – Active Bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
3.28 LC – Load Case and Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
3.29 ELLO – Quad tendon prestress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
3.30 TEMB – Temperature for BRIC Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
3.31 TEMP – Temperature from HYDRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
3.32 PEXT – Prestress of External Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
3.33 LCC – Copy of Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
3.34 EIGE – Eigenvalues and -vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
3.35 MASS – Lumped Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
3.36 V0 – Initial Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
3.37 REIN – Specification for Determining Reinforcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
3.38 DESI – Reinforced Concrete Design, Bending, Axial Force . . . . . . . . . 3-104
3.39 NSTR – Non-linear Stress and Strain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-109
3.40 Non-linear Material Analysis in ASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-111
3.41 ECHO – Output Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115

Bibliography 3-119

SOFiSTiK 2025 iii

ASE | Contents

iv SOFiSTiK 2025
 Task Description | ASE

1 Task Description

ASE calculates the static and dynamic effects of general loading on any type of structure. To
start the calculations the user divides the structure to be analyzed into an assembly of individual
elements interconnected at nodes (Finite Element Method). Possible types of elements are
: haunched beams, springs, cables, truss elements, plane triangular or quadrilateral shell
elements and three-dimensional continuum elements.

The program handles structures with rigid or elastic types of support. An elastic support can
be applied to an area, a line or at nodal points. Rigid elements or skew supports can be taken
into account.

ASE calculates the effects of nodal, line and block loads. The loads can be defined indepen-
dently from the selected element mesh. The generation of loads from stresses of a primary
load case allows the consideration of construction stages, redistribution and creep effects.

Non-linear calculations enables the user to take the failure of particular elements into account,
such as: cables in compression, uplifting of supported plates, yielding, friction or crack effects
for spring and foundation elements. Non-linear materials are available for three-dimensional
and shell elements. Geometrical non-linear computations allow the investigation of 2nd and
3rd order theory effects by cable, beam, shell and volume structures.

In case of beam structures, the program can calculate warping torsion with up to 7 degrees of
freedom per node.

The user of ASE should therefore gather experience from simple examples before tackling
more complicated structures. A check of the results through approximate engineering calcula-
tions is imperative.

The basic version of ASE performs the linear analyses of beams, cables, trusses, plane and
volume structures. Plain strain and rotational systems can be analyzed with TALPA.

SOFiSTiK 2025 1-1

ASE | Task Description

Extended versions of ASE offer calculations of:

• Influence surfaces
• Non-linear analyses
• Pile elements with linear/parabolic soil coefficient distribution
• Creep and shrinkage
• Forces from construction stages
• Modal analysis, Time step method
• Material non-linearities
• Geometrical non-linearities
• Membrane elements
• Evaluation of collapse load
• Non-linear dynamics

1-2 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

2 Theoretical Principles

2.1 General
A continuum or a plane structure can be interpreted as a statically or geometrically infinitely
indeterminate structure. If an analytical solution is unknown, every numerically approximate
method is based on converting this infinite system into a finite one, in other words to discretizing
it.

The advantage of the finite elements lies in their universal applicability to any geometrical
shape and almost to any loading. This is achieved by a modular principle. Single elements
which describe parts of the structure in a computer oriented manner are assembled into a
complete structure.

The continuous structure is represented thus by a large but finite number of elements. A
discrete solution consisting of n unknowns is calculated instead of the continuous solution. In
general, the approximate solution may represent the exact solution better with the use of more
elements. The single elements of an area can be of arbitrarily small dimensions in comparison
to the dimensions of the overall structure without giving rise to any incompatibilities with the
presented theory. The refinement of the subdivision is, however, subjected to certain limitations
due to numerical reasons.

The Finite Element Method (FEM) employed in ASE is a displacement method, meaning that
the unknowns are deformation values at several selected points, the so-called nodes. Displace-
ments can be obtained with an element-wise interpolation of the nodal values. The calculation
of the mechanical behaviour is based generally on an energy principle (minimisation of the
deformation work). The result is a so-called stiffness matrix. This matrix specifies the reaction
forces at the nodes of an element when these nodes are subjected to known displacements.

The global force equilibrium is generated then for each node in order to determine the un-
knowns. A force in the same direction which is a function of this or another displacement
corresponds to each displacement. This leads to a system of equations with n unknowns,
where n can become very large. Numerically beneficial banded matrices result, however, due
to the local character of the element-wise interpolation.

The complete method is divided into four main parts:

1. Determination of the element stiffness matrices.

2. Assembly of the global stiffness matrix and solution of the resulting equation system
3. Application of loads and determination of the corresponding displacements.
4. Determination of the element stresses and support reactions due to the computed dis-
placements.

The second step is that with most CPU time. It may use up to 90 percent of the total CPU time.
However, it has to occur only once for a static system.

The stresses jumps from element to element. The size of the jump is thus a direct measure of
the quality of the FE analysis.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-1

ASE | Theoretical Principles

2.2 Implemented Elements - licence level

The elements shown in the following table are available in ASE. A non-linear analysis can occur
also for some types of elements. A detailed list of the implemented nonlinear effects is written
in section 3.40.

Program ASE runs with licences to ASE, SEPP and PFAHL. Depending on the licence not all
elements can be used - see following table. Nonlinear analsis also require a higher licence
level.

Non-linear Geometrical
Element Material Non-linearity
SPRI yes yes
TRUS yes+tension failure yes
CABL yes+compression failure yes + cable sag
BEAM yes yes
PILE1 elastic bedding only yes
QUAD2 yes yes
BRIC12 yes yes
BOUN - -
FLEX12 - -
Halfspace2 yes -

1 not available on licence SEPP

2 not available on licence PFAHL

2.3 Beam Elements

The beam element in ASE is an arbitrary haunched beam element including shear deforma-
tions and hinge effects. It can be defined also eccentrically to the node connecting line. For
haunched cross sections in bridge analysis all nodes can be defined on the top face of the
superstructure.

2.3.1 Geometric nonlinear Theory 2nd and 3rd Order

The following figures shall clarify the essential characteristics between SOFiSTiK theory 2nd
and 3rd order (TH2 and TH3).

In the column example in figure 2.1 the effect of theory TH2 causes a stiffness reduction in the
column due to the compression normal force (geometric stiffness). This creates an additional
deflection dux in x direction (no duz!). The beam can get longer than in the original shape. The
bottom bending moment increases due to the displacement of the vertical load Pz. This type
of analysis is also known as pi-delta method.

In the complete geometric nonlinear analysis TH3 the column head follows the physically cor-
rect path. Equilibrium is iterated on the real deformed shape.

In figure 2.3 a horizontally fixed bending girder is loaded vertically. In TH2 the girder just

2-2 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Pz

P d − TH2
 − TH3

TH2 TH3

Figure 2.1: Column geometric nonlinear theory 2nd and 3rd order

deflects vertical without a normal force N:

TH2 : N = 0 TH3 : N

Figure 2.2: girder left+right fixed in x! : TH3 induces a load carrying normal force N

In the TH3 analysis the vertical displacement causes a lengthing of the beam. The created
normal force N carries a part of the load and reduces the vertical deformation.

Examples see SYST

Only in TH3 on beam-, quad- and bric elements the rigid body motions are substracted from
the total displacements to get the stress inducing pure deformations:

Figure 2.3: Rigid body motion in theory 3rd order TH3)

2.3.2 Coordinate System of Forces, Center of Gravity

In TH2 the forces are related to the original coordinate system. So the shear forces are
transversal forces. In the column example in figure 2.1 N stays vertical and VZ stays hori-

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-3

ASE | Theoretical Principles

zontal. In TH3 the forces are always related to the deformed beam coordinate system.

N
N
VZ
VZ

TH2 TH3

Figure 2.4: Definition of forces in geometric nonlinear theory 2nd and 3rd order

The beam forces N, MY and MZ are related to the center of gravity of the actual active partial
section (not to node connecting line). MT, VY and VZ are related to the center of shear.

Dead load is applied in the center of mass since version 2016. So an excentric dead load
(refered to the center of stiffness) is taken into account.

2.3.3 Warping torsion

Warping torsion can be used for straight beam structures with CTRL WARP 1.

Warping effects can also appear without warping support. In the following picture to example
ase11_girder_overturning.dat in loadcase 11 a single moment MT=1 kNm (2*0.50 kNm) is
applied in midspan of a single girder
90 % of it work via warping torsion as force pairs in the flanges - see MTs = 0.45 kNm. 10 %
go directly into the section via Saint Venant shear - see MTp = 0.05 kNm. Warping parts (ASE
output):

The total torsional moment Mt has 3 parts (MT= MTp +MTs +MTn):

MTp - primary torsional moment from Saint Venant shear stresses

MTs - secondary tors. moment (flange shear from warping longitudinal stresses)
MTn - theory 2. order torsional moment from twisted normal stresses
Mb warping moment (from warping longitudinal stresses - creates MTs at other beam sections)

You can imagine the behavior as follows: the flange forces in midspan deflect the flanges
opposite and transport a part of the loading via longitudinal stresses to the support.

The longitudinal warping stress due to Mb in midspan create a flange shear force at the sup-
ports. The corresponding torsional momennt MTs at the support is about 0.05 kNm. At the
support itself, the longitudinal warping stresses are zero (free end) - see Mb = 0 kNm. The
effects are as follows:

2-4 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

MT

MTp

Mb
MTs

Figure 2.5: Warping torsion - bottom: clarity of thought "web removed" (-> MTp=0)

The warping effects are also explained in warping_mtp_mts_mtn.dat. There the interaction of
MTs and Mb for a MT load on a cantilever is interpretet as follows:

• Please notice that at the cantlever end (beam 10 x= 0.4) already a part of the load MT=
10 kNm is carried by warping although there are no longitudinal warping stresses at that
location (free end)!
• You can imagine this in the following way:
The top flange longitudinal warping stresses at beam 1 x=0 want to pull pack the top flange
at the cantilever. The bottom flange longitudinal warping stresses want to pull pack the
bottom flange as well.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-5

ASE | Theoretical Principles

• This pair of forces (flange shear from warping longitudinal stresses) carries a part of the
MT loading.
• So the longitudinal warping stresses at the beginning of the beam create a MTs at the end
- and oposite.
• An MTs at a beam section x1 creates longitudinal warping stresses at another beam section
x2.

2.3.4 SOFiSTiK - T-Beam Philosophy centric (for buildings)

See YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GoT1f0aGdgs

Automatic addition of the T-beam parts for FE plates with beams

Example see ase3_t_beam_test.dat

Figure 2.6: T-Beam Philosophy

Attention: This model can not be used for influence line evaluation with ELLA because ELLA
does not add the slab parts to the beam! This is only possible with the excentric T-Beam
philosophy with TBEX

A 2D slab analysis is usually sufficient and desirable for beams and continuous beams with
effective cross section widths in a slab. Only in a 2D slab analysis normal forces are not
determined in the slab or in the beam! The advantage is that the slab can be simply designed
(without normal forces) particularly for the shear checks. In addition the determined beam
moments can be designed directly with the right T-beam cross section.

Procedure: The user or the graphical input program positions a centric defined beam in the
node plane (with the T-beam cross section see picture on the right). The QUAD elements are
also defined centric. As the beam is positioned in the centre of gravity (a little bit below the
slab center), the upper edge of the T-beam looks a little bit out of the slab - this is also visible in
WinGRAF. The ANIMATOR displaces the cross section a little bit downwards, so that the upper
edges beam+slab appear at the same position for a better visualization. So in the standard
case the beam section is defined with the corresponding effective slab width. Looking from the
side (see picture left below) you see that cross section parts and slab overlap and concrete
areas are defined twice. These double parts are now corrected in the T-Beam philosophy:

Therefore in the stiffness analysis the slab part (I-slab = bVh3/12 with b=effective width = width
of the cross section) is substracted automatically from the stiffness of the beam I-Tbeam. An
equivalent (reduced) beam is used:

2-6 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

I–equivalent beam = I–Tbeam – I–slab

In the same way the deadload of the equivalent beam is modified to avoid double dead load.

Then the program at first determines a bending moment of this equivalent beam in a FE anal-
ysis. The internal forces parts of the slab (M-slab = m-slab · b) are added automatically imme-
diately. Thus the complete T-beam internal forces are available for the following beam design:

M–Tbeam = M–equivalent beam + M–slab

The bending moments My and the shear forces Vz are added as default, for shells also the
normal forces N. The torsional moment Mt is not added as default.

Output:

• The parts of the slab are already included in the printout of the beam forces.
• A statistic of the slab parts follows. The maximum slab parts are compared with the maxi-
mum beam internal forces:

Statistic Beam - Additional Forces from a Slab

Loadcase 2
The printed beam-forces include max. additional forces of a slab:
max. beam-force without slab-addition max. slab-addition
cno bm Vz My Vz My
[m] [kN] [kNm] [kN] [kNm]
1 2.20 max 48.60 243.78 43.63 5.95
min -48.60 0.00 -43.63 0.00

For safety the internal forces are not reduced in the FE plate elements, although it would be
possible about the amount of the increase of the beam internal forces. So this method can be
uneconomical for smaller beam heights.

Beams which are connected with kinematic constraints at the slab are also processed, if the
beams are positioned in the slab plane.

Defaults for the addition of the plate internal forces to the beam internal forces:

For slab structures:

• The single beam must have a cross section with a defined width at the start and the end.
A defined width can be generated from a T-beam (e.g. record SREC in AQUA) and from
general cross sections (e.g. AQUA record SECT and following). The maximum width of
the cross section is used in each case (independent of the position of the plate, above or
below). A cross section which is input without dimensions however with stiffnesses (e.g.
with record SVAL) does not known any defined width. A plate part can therefore not be
added for these beams!
• The single beam is connected generally directly with the nodes of the plate.
• After an automatic mesh generation or a free mesh definition the straight beam which
is positioned in the plate plane can be combined also with the FE mesh via kinematic
constraints.
• The beam reads the plate thickness and the modulus of elasticity from these plate nodes.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-7

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Different plate thicknesses are possible at the beam start and end.

Additionally for three-dimensional slab structures (ASE):

The feature can be used also for three-dimensional slabs however with following restrictions:

• The beams must be positioned in the same plane as the plate. The plate parts are not
added for beams which are connected eccentrically or with couplings and also not in case
of excentric quads. Then also no double dead load is substracted.

Special features with the input:

• The beam cross section must represent the effective cross section, therefore the web and
the effective plate. If a concrete slab on a steel girder should be considered as a composite
construction, the steel girder must be defined with the effective concrete plate as cross
section! The determined internal forces and moments refer then to this composite cross
section.
• The effective width (cross section width) should be chosen a little bit smaller than to large
especially over the columns, because for the plate moment to be added only the moment
near the node at which the beam and the plate are combined is used (see CTRL PLAB
V2). This plate moment is processed then unchangeable acting about the whole width.
The internal forces and moments are therefore not exactly integrated about the effective
width!
• The plate stiffness I-plate (without the part of Steiner) is diverted from the total cross section
stiffness I-cross. If the subtrahend I-plate is bigger than 0.8·I-cross, a warning is printed
and the minimum stiffness of 0.2·I-cross is used.
• For three-dimensional systems the subtrahend is maximal 0.9·A-cross for the area A-plate.
At least 0.1·A-cross are available then for the fictitious beam in the FE system.

Special features with the output:

• The attenuated stiffnesses are printed with ECHO PLAB FULL. If a cross section is avail-
able at beams with different plate thicknesses (e.g. haunches), the attenuated stiffness is
printed for the minimal and maximal plate thickness.
• The plate parts are already available in the printed beam internal forces and moments and
can be designed directly.

For comparison a load case can be calculated once without input of CTRL PLAB and the
second time with CTRL PLAB 0 and another load case number. The beam internal forces and
moments of both calculations can be represented then with the same scale in a picture.

(More precise) calculation possibilities:

Also with the above describes method, the normal forces occur in the compression zone (plate)
first during the design of the T-beam. Normal forces are not considered during the calculation
of the FE system. The effective width has to be estimated manually and defined. In reality the
normal forces act from the supports into the plate. For a more precise calculation three pos-
sibilities are described here. For all three variants the effective width is realized automatically
via the normal force calculation and has not to be input:

1. The web part which is positioned below the plate can be defined as a beam which lies

2-8 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

beam at FE node

beam which is connect ed

wit h kinemat ic const r aint s

CTRL PL AB 0
added plat e par t s

Figure 2.7: Beam internal forces

eccentrically below the plate. Then two nodes lying upon each other are however neces-
sary for the system input. This complicates the input. Problems occur also for the design,
because the sum of the internal forces from web+plate including the parts of Steiner are
necessary for a design of the total T-beam. The method is therefore only reasonable for
composite slabs with eccentrically defined steel beams (see ASE example 5.3).

kinemat ic const r aint

Figure 2.8: Eccentrical defined steel beam

2. The web can be also generated with shell elements. The same problems for the design
result as for the eccentrical beam. In addition it should be noted that the area in the
intersection point plate-web is not defined twice:

Figure 2.9: Shell elements

3. The SOFiSTiK offers the eccentrical plate elements as a real alternative. The system
is generated here with different thick plate elements. The plate elements get a larger
thickness in the area of the beams. A simply defined node plane which lies at the upper

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-9

ASE | Theoretical Principles

edge of the plate is here necessary in the input. All elements can be defined eccentrically
below the node plane. Thereby all elements have the same upper edge, the thicker
beam elements stand only below out. Normal forces which are considered for the design
are produced due to the eccentrical position of the elements. Thereby the usual plate
design is done simultaneously the beam design - a special beam design is therefore
not necessary. The FE analysis uses here automatically the real effective width via the
simultaneous analysis of the normal force distribution. This method is therefore applicable
not only for the analysis of building slabs but also for analysis of concrete bridges. Each
elements is processed for themselves alone during design and not the total T-beam
cross section! This method is however only correct for beams with moderate thickness.
The design can be uneconomical for larger beams (web height larger than 2.5·plate
thickness), but it is in each case at the sure side. The simple method with fictitious beams
lying in the plate is more practical for larger web heights.

plane of the
node points

eccenticity

centroid line of QUAD lying

underside of the below the ndoe plane
QUAD elements

Figure 2.10: Eccentrical plate element

In example steel_composite_real.dat three methods with beams are compared for bridge de-
sign. In voided_slabḋat and tendon_failureḋat excentric quads are used for the slab cantilever.

For all analysis methods the resultant internal forces and moments can be determined with the
program SIR (Sectional Results) and DECREATOR. Afterwards a design as beam cross sec-
tion is possible, also for system 2 from folded structure elements. This is especially necessary
in bridge design for checks of the ultimate limit state and for checks for safety against cracking.

Literature: Katz and Stieda [1], Wunderlich, Kiener, and Ostermann [2], Bellmann [3], and
Katz [4]

2-10 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

2.3.5 T-Beam Philosophy excentric (for bridges)

See YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GoT1f0aGdgs

In bridge design the following method is perfect to get the full forces in the beam and at the
same time use a quad slab for the distribution of loads:

Separation of forces to beam and slab

Bem Qd

Figure 2.11: Example two girder T-Beam bridge with quad deck

Main example t_beam_bridge_excentric.dat

also with comfortable temperature input via CSM-TEMP.

As you immediately see in figure 2.11 concrete is input twice, one time in the quad and at the
same location in the beam section. This is done because the traditional bridge engineer wants
100% of the force in longitudinal direction in the beam section. In the T-Beam philosophy on
excentric beams with TBEX the double parts are treated as shown in figure Bild 2.12:

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-11

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Bem Qd

correctonbem

Figure 2.12: Internally used stiffness parts in longitudinal direction

The double defined concrete part (beam+quad) is now substracted using a correction beam.
This correction beam is created automatically using TBEX and has a negative stiffness to
compensate the double concrete part, also in excentric position. You can say it is an excentric
beam with negative E-modulus. The forces of the three parts are now as shown in figure 2.13:

N=0
Bem M = 1000 kNm

Qd
N = -150 kN
M = 80 kNm

correctonbem
N = +150 kN
M = -80 kNm

Figure 2.13: Forces of the three parts e.g. on 1000 kNm external bending moment

As the correction beam compensates the stiffness of the quads in longitudinal direction of the
bridge, the real beam gets the full bending moment of the bridge as in a discretisation with
beams only.

The quad elements are excentrically above the center of gravity of the beam and so get a
compression normal force. The correction beam gets the oposite forces due to the negative
stiffness. We see that the sum of forces of all three parts is exactly N=0 and M= 1000 kNm.

All forces are related to the center of the individual part as they also appear in WINGARF and
AQB.

Comment to internal analysis: the real beam also stores the forces of the correction beam.

2-12 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Setting on a primary load case (CSM construction stages), all parts are taken into account
correctly. For temperature loading and creep and shrinkage this is done as well. The correction
beam uses the creep and shinkage values from the quads and so also compensates the creep
and shrinkage of the quad elements.

Problem normal forces: the beam bending moments reach quite well the results of a pure
beam analysis. But in a pure beam analysis no normal forces occur in such a simple two span
girder. Unfortunately we cannot reach this with TBEX and full isotropic quads because the
correction beam shall compensate the stiffness of the quads but cannnot do this completely for
the normal forces. The following figure 2.14 shows the normal forces in the quads. We see the
typical compression bulb - that means that the normal forces need some time or distance to
flow from the slab into the web. Or in other words: the forces need some time (some distance)
to spread to whole slab:

Figure 2.14: Normal forces in the quad deck slab

Figure 2.15: Distance for the web shear force to spread into the slab

As the correction beam is a beam element, the normal force due to the excentricity to the real
beam is created immediately - without a shift due to the compression bulb. So the real beam
gets a (little) delta-N, see following figure:

Bem

correctonbem Qd

det − N

Figure 2.16: Center: normal force in the excentirc correction beam

If this disadvantage counts more than the advantage of a full isotropic slab (better load distribu-
tion, transverse prestress) you can also use the quad slab without normal stiffness with GRP2
QUEA 1E-5 as shown in loadcase 103 in t_beam_excentric_test.dat.

Further remarks to dead load, transverse slab prestress, ELLA and a possible reduction of the

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-13

ASE | Theoretical Principles

normal stiffness of the slab can be found at the input of TBEX.

2.4 Pile Elements

A single pile is idealized through a straight, elastically supported beam with shear deformations
and 2nd order theory. It is numerically integrated with the complete system of 12 differential
equations. Pile elements get a minimal constraint of the rotational spring in order to prevent
instabilities.

Example see single_pile.dat

These equations are integrated numerically with the Runge-Kutta method.

With GRP FACB the bedding can be varied, e.g for an analysis with critical values.

PLC analysis for piles:

In this way also system with pile elements can be used including creep in CSM. Shrinkage will
never be taken into account for piles, creep acts for the pile and the bedding! If GRP PHIF is
input this value is taken for both the pile and the bedding.

The pile element is not contained in the basic licence of ASE.

2.4.1 Winkler Coefficient

For their definition it is most important to take into account that the Winkler coefficient is not a
simple material property but depends on the system dimensions and the loading. The Winkler
coefficient defines the stress caused by a given deformation whereas the influence of adjacent
points (shear deformations) is not taken into account. The dimension of a bedding is therefore
given as kN/ m3 . A displacement causes a stress (kN/ m2 ).

However, the pile bedding is defined in kN/ m2 since the pile ”width” has to be integrated into
this value. In this case, a displacement causes a load (kN/ m). Since the pile width influences
also the Winkler coefficient, the pile dimensions are dropped possibly from the equation and
the pile Winkler coefficient can be estimated also from the elastic modulus of the soil and a
form factor.

For circular pile cross sections and a Poisson’s ratio of 0.4 a form factor of 1.12 can be derived.
For a Poisson’s ratio of 0.0 the form factor would be 1.57. In EBK 82 of the Road Traffic
Department in Rheinland-Pfalz the extreme values of the form factor are scheduled to be 0.5
and 2.0.

Simplifying to DIN 4014 a foundation modulus ks = Es / D (at D > 1.0m D = 1.0m may be used)
can be determined. For the input, the user has to multiply this value with D because SOFiSTiK
requires a beam bedding input k = D · ks as line-shaped foundation per m pile length.

2.4.2 Numerical Solution and Accuracy

In general, the set of differential equations can not be solved directly. Therefore, for each pile,
these equations are integrated numerically by the Runge-Kutta method. The step width is con-
trolled automatically to maintain a relative accuracy of 0.01 percent. The setting of higher error
limits results in a reduction of the CPU time. The setting of smaller error limits is reasonable up
to a certain value, which depends on the machine accuracy of the computer used. The reduc-
tion of the error limit below a certain value is not reasonable because the computational error

2-14 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

increases again due to the rounding errors in the high number of the necessary additions.

In the case of an unbedded beam the step width can be set very large. By contrast, for
large Winkler coefficients the numerical calculation becomes more difficult. As a criterion the
characteristic length is used, defined as:
p
4
L= 4 · E/ K (2.1)

This value is an estimation of the distance between the zero points of the solution function.
For reasons with reference to the numerical integration, the characteristic length should not
become less than 1/5 up to 1/10 of the element length. If this condition is not satisfied, great
accuracy problems may occur resulting in differential forces in the nodes which are pointed out
in an error message.

These problems can be overcome by subdividing a pile into more subelements.

In the case that a pile is subdivided into more elements, the placing of the nodes at points of
changing soil parameters (layers) is to be preferred over an uniform subdivision.

Pile elements get a minimal constraint of the rotational spring in order to prevent instabilities.

If otherwise nothing was specified, a linear analysis is performed. Non-linear effects are:

• Different bedding in various transverse directions (F1 - term of the series sequence)
• Limitation of the maximum bedding stresses
• Second order theory

For these cases an iterative calculation has to be carried out.

The program uses the ”Quasi-Newton” method with constant stiffness matrix. To obtain a better
convergence the single increments are modified according to the Crisfield method.

Literature: Katz [5]

2.5 Truss and Cable Elements

Truss and cable elements can transfer only axial forces. In the case of non-linear analysis a
cable element can not sustain compressive forces, truss element only compression in case of
setting CRAC=0. Example see ase5_cable_trestle.dat

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PmAeevUeJcU

An internal cable sag is considered for geometrically non-linear analysis and SYST-PROB-
NONB. Taking into account the transverse loading ASE iterates the horizontal force H and
the sagging f iteratively using common equations for the elastic plane stressed cable. For the
control of the inner cable sagging see CTRL CABL.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-15

ASE | Theoretical Principles

y
y A’ B
A B
a h
H H A
B’
f ƒ () d
v C v b
g H C H
g g
x  x
l a b
d l

Figure 2.17: Cable sagging f and H force for a transverse loaded single cable element

In the output you then find the tangential effective stiffness including the cable sagging effect
(factor to the original stiffness E*A/L). With SFIX this effective stiffness can also be used for
quasi-linear traffic loads in ASE and ELLA. So for a cable stayed bridge you can first optimize a
geometric nonlinear final system with CSM-OPTI and then use the effective stiffness for further
analysis. For SFIX see example optimize_csm28_suspension_bridge_real.dat

The cable angles at the anchorage can be analyzed with CSM-CABL, see opti-
mize_csm21_cable_anchorage_angle.dat

In dynamic analysis long cables must be devided by nodes to get inner cable vibrations, be-
cause masses are only applied at nodes. See example dynamics_cable_dynamics.dat

2.6 Spring Elements

Spring elements idealize structural parts by means of a simplified force-displacement relation-
ship. This is usually a linear equation which is based on the spring constant:

P=C· (2.2)

A spring is defined with a direction (dX, dY, dZ) and three spring constants.

The here implemented element allows the following non-linear effects which are of course only
usefully during a non-linear analysis:

• prestress (linear effect)

• failure
• yield
• friction with cohesion (sliding friction and stiction see CTRL SPRI V4)
• slip
• spring nonlinear work laws, please refer to section 3.40
• springs with a reference area AR and a nonlinear material work law

2-16 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.18: Spring force-displacement diagrams

A prestress displaces the corresponding effects and produces always a loading which acts on
the structure. A prestress should not be defined in the system generation because it acts in all
loadcases. It is better to use the prestress in ASE...PREX. A prestressed spring gets a relax-
ation in the absence of external loading or constraints. The non-linear effects are considered
both for rotational and displacement springs. Friction can be defined with a lateral spring. The
force component perpendicular to the spring effect direction results from the product of the
displacement component in the lateral direction multiplied by the lateral spring constant. The
maximum value of this force, however, is equal to the force in the primary direction multiplied
by the friction coefficient plus the cohesion. If the primary spring fails, the lateral spring gets
eliminated too.

Spring loads are not included. A bearing lifting can be modelled in ASE with the group prestress
GRP PREX also for coupling springs.

Springs with a work law (see SOFIMSHA SARB) work with hysteresis by shifting the zeropoint
of the work law curve after plastification. Examples see a1_spring_overview.dat
e.g. spring_law_3_pkin_curve.dat

In coupling springs with a distance a transverse force in the spring also induces a moment
effekt (transverse force * distance). This effect can be switched off, see CTRL SPRI. CTRL
SPRI can also be set different per group using CTRL SPRI ... GRP ...

2.7 Boundary Elements BOUN and FLEX

The elastic boundary conditions do not represent actual elements. They describe the additional
stiffnesses of the structure. Results are not saved in the case of FLEX. The effect of the
elements appears directly in the form of support reactions at the corresponding nodes. For
BOUN additional distributed boundary forces are stored for graphical output.

Distributed support reactions are determined for boundary elements with number (compare
program SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC). If two boundaries are defined at an edge, the distributed
support reactions are calculated once only and they are output for the boundary with the
smaller boundary number. Single supports can not be considered by boundary elements.

A boundary element interpolates linearly the displacements between two nodes. The resultant

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-17

ASE | Theoretical Principles

distribution of the stiffness matrix at the two nodes is

CR + 3 · CL CR + CL
(2.3)
CR + CL CL + 3 · CR

with:

CR = CA · L/ 12
CL = CB · L/ 12
CA,CB spring constants at beginning/end
L distance of nodes.

2.8 Shell Elements

The shell element implemented in program ASE is a surface element. The individual elements
are plane and they lie in each case in a plane whose normal is generated through the vector
product ((X3-X1)·(X2-X4)) of the diagonals. The deviation of the element’s plane from the
nodes is taken into consideration by means of additional eccentricities. So the element also
works correct with twisted geometry. The local coordinate system is oriented in such a way that
the z axis is given with the normal to the element’s plane and the local x axis can be selected
freely. The default orientation is parallel to the global XY plane with an angle smaller-equal than
90 degrees to the global X axis. If the observer looks into the positive direction of the z axis
(thus from ”above ”), then he watches the nodes numbered counter-clockwise. If the element’s
plane coincides with the global XY plane, the local and the global coordinate systems are then
identical.

Figure 2.19: Local coordinate system

The element is implemented as a triangular as well as a quadrilateral element. The triangular

element is considerably worse than the quadrilateral element and it should be used only, if no
other choice of mesh partitioning can be found. Generally it should not to be used in the vicinity
of supports.

2-18 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.20: Internal forces and moments

Because the normal element remains plane, the bending and the membrane structural be-
haviour of the individual element are decoupled. The element properties can be defined thus
separately for the both components. Additionally the consideration of the components of an
elastic support and a numerically conditional stiffness for the rotations around the shell normal
occurs still.

For a twisted element the membrane and plate parts are generated by decoupling. Then they
are coupled with each other via the twist of the element. Thus the element is able to represent
curved shells very exactly. This was demonstrated with corresponding benchmarks.

The consideration of each structural behaviour can be specified in the program SOFIMSHA/-
SOFIMSHC for each particular element. The defaulted values are:

SYST FRAM membrane structural behaviour only

SYST GIRD plate structural behaviour only
SYST SPAC additionally rotations around the normal

The elements defined in SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC without load bearing behaviour are not con-
sidered for the structure. They can be referenced, however, in the case of load cases with free
loads. In this way, a load area which consists of QUAD elements can be used for block loading
of girders or three-dimensional elements.

The ASE element is defined as a general quadrilateral. The accuracy of the solution, how-
ever, depends on the geometry of the element, thus not all conceivable element shapes are
permitted.

The optimum element is the square or the equilateral triangle. Rectangles and parallelograms
are the second-best shape and the general quadrilateral the third-best. General quadrilaterals
with re-entrant corners are not allowed in the element formulation.

A rectangle with a large side ratio a/b has difficulties in the representation of the twisting mo-
ments and also for the bending near a corner. A ratio of 1:5 is still tolerated in the program
SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC and it should be exceeded only in exceptions. The size ratio of two
adjacent elements should not be smaller than approx. 1:5. However, this value is relatively
uncritical.

The ratio thickness to element dimension is uncritical, because a shear correction factor is
applied. It should be clear to the user, however, that the shear deformations in the case of
thick plates result in deviations from the Kirchhoff’s theory. The ratio of the thicknesses of two

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-19

ASE | Theoretical Principles

adjacent elements should not be smaller than 1:10 due to its cubic effect.

2.8.1 Plate Structural Behaviour

The ASE element for the plate structural behaviour is based on Mindlin’s plate theory, as de-
scribed in the implementations of Hughes and Tezduyar [6], Tessler and Hughes [7] and Cr-
isfield [8], with an extension of a non-conforming formulation, see Fig. 2.21.

The cross sections remain plane also according to Mindlin’s theory, however, they are not
perpendicular anymore to the neutral axis. The same shape functions as for the displacements
are used for the additional shear rotations. The total rotation is then the sum of the shear
deformation and the bending rotation.
δ
θ = + θS (2.4)
δ
with:

 deflection
θ total rotation
θS shear rotation
δ / δ derivative w.r.t. x (similarly for y)

For the curvature and the shear angle we then have:

δθ
k = (2.5)
δ

δθy
ky = (2.6)
δy

δθ δθy
ky = + (2.7)
δ δy

δ
θS = θ − (2.8)
δ

δ
θSy = θy − (2.9)
δy

A general orthotropic accretion which includes the thicknesses as well as the elastic moduli is
formulated for the internal forces and moments:

m = −B · k − μ · By · ky (2.10)

my = −By · ky − μ · By · k (2.11)

2-20 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

my = −Bd · ky (2.12)

and

 = S · θS (2.13)

y = Sy · θSy (2.14)

with the stiffnesses

E · t3 5
B = S = G · t (2.15)
12 · (1 − μ2 ) 6

Ey · ty3 5
By = Sy = G · ty (2.16)
12 · (1 − μ2 ) 6

transverse bending stiffness

3
E · ty
By = (2.17)
12 · (1 − μ2 )

torsional stiffness

G · td3
Bd = (2.18)
12

with

E , Ey elastic moduli
G shear modulus
μ Poisson’s ratio
t , ty , ty , td plate thicknesses

In the isotropic case one must set t = ty = ty = td = t and E = Ey = E.

The orthotropic elastic moduli and thicknesses are rotated through the input of an orthotropy
angle OAL in the record MAT!

a) For orthotropic material (e.g. mathematical cross section of prestressed concrete or wood)
it can be set:
q
By = Bd = B · By (2.19)

To reach this the mathematical thickness for ty and td must be input in addition to the

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-21

ASE | Theoretical Principles

orthotropic input of E and Ey .

Æ
ty = td = t ·
3
By/ B (2.20)

with B > By and ty = t .

b) For timber slabs you can use more advanced FLAY layered materials
see example timber_quad_layer.dat
You can also input the complete 8*8 stiffness matrix, see timber_8x8_matrix.dat
c) For corrugated steel can be applied (Timoshenko)

‹ πƒ 2
  
z = ƒ · sin π · ; α =1+ (2.21)
 2

1 E · t3
B = · (2.22)
α 12 · (1 − μ2 )

 
0.81 E · t · ƒ2
B y = 1 − € Š2
· (2.23)
ƒ 2
1 + 2.5 2

By ≈ 0 (2.24)

α E · t3
Bd = · (2.25)
2 12 · (1 − μ2 )

d) For web plates (y-axis in longitudinal direction) one can set:

!1/ 3
b · to3
ty = t · 1 + (2.26)
 · t3

ty = t (2.27)

Bd = Bd (t ) + C/ (2 · ) (2.28)

where:
C torsional stiffness of the web,
, b spacing and width of the web,
t , to thickness of the plate and web.

Examples for orthotropic cases can be found e.g. in the book by Timoshenko and Woinowsky-
Krieger [9].

2-22 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

2.8.2 Membrane Structural Behaviour

The thicknesses as well as the elastic moduli in different directions are taken into consideration.
The poisson ratio corresponding to Ex is used. For anisotropic poisson’s ratio see chapter
membrane structures and example membrane_poisson_ratio.dat

n = S · ε − μ · Sy · εy (2.29)

nyy = Sy · εy − μ · Sy · ε (2.30)

ny = G · ty · γy (2.31)

with the stiffnesses:

E · t
S = (2.32)
1 − μ2

Ey · ty
Sy = (2.33)
1 − μ2

E · ty
Sy = (2.34)
1 − μ2

See also separate chapter Membrane Structures.

2.8.3 Elastic Foundation

The QUAD element can be expanded with stiffness components in order to describe an elasti-
cally supported area. Only appropriate inputs can activate this foundation component.

The foundation can be defined both perpendicularly and tangentially to the area. The non-
linear effects like failure, yielding and friction may be specified.

The foundation coefficient indicates the stress resulting at a point which is subjected to a certain
displacement. It is not a material constant, it is calculated later with a settlement analysis. In
principle, its value always consists of an elastic modulus together with a geometrical dimension.
The displacements of adjacent points are independent of each other, since shear deformations
are not taken into consideration with this method.

A more exact analysis of foundations according to the stiffness modulus method is possible
with the program HASE.

The easiest case is a single compressible layer of uniform thickness h. The calculation of the
Winkler coefficient is achieved by applying a constant stress and by computing the resultant
displacement. In the case of hindered lateral strain the result is
E (1 − μ) Es
C= · = (2.35)
h (1 + μ) · (1 − 2μ) h

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-23

ASE | Theoretical Principles

In analog mode one can obtain Winkler coefficients for multi-layered systems. These coeffi-
cients are more acceptable as the layer becomes thinner in comparison to its deformation. If,
however, the layer is relatively thick in comparison to the loaded area, or if it is infinitely thick,
the Winkler coefficient has to be estimated in a settlement analysis at the point of interest. The
horizontal foundation has usually the same order of magnitude.

Column heads are defined sometimes with elastic foundations, especially in the case of ma-
sonry. By defining the Winkler coefficient one must keep in mind, that a two-dimensional
foundation develops a certain rotational spring effect which is more important to the loading of
a plate than the perpendicular displacement spring.

A column of the height h which is supported articulated at its foot has a rotational stiffness
equal to
3 · E
Cϕ = (2.36)
h

This stiffness should correspond to a rotational spring foundation with

Cϕ = C ·  (2.37)

From that follows

3·E
C= (2.38)
h

The corresponding value for a column fixed at its foot is 4 · E/ h.

Therefore it is correct to define a foundation three till four times higher, instead of the Winkler
coefficient E/h, in order to describe the rotational foundation properly. If, however, the plate is
supported articulated on the column, this type of foundation should not be used in any case
because of its clamping effect against rotation. In this case it is recommended to use a single
point support of a node and distribute the load by means of rigid or elastic elements (kinematic
constraints).

Support reactions which result from a QUAD foundation are printed and stored as nodal sup-
port reactions. Thus a graphical check of the support reactions is facilitated.

2.8.4 Rotations around the Shell Normal

The rotational degree of freedom around the shell normal is not contained in both load bear-
ing behaviours. In order to prevent numerical difficulties for three-dimensional structures, the
Inplane-rotation of the nodes is coupled via a weak torsional spring at the displacements of the
corner nodes in an intern way.

2.8.5 Twisted Shell Elements

If not all four nodes of an element lie in a plane (e.g. in the case of a hypershell), then the
program defines an eccentric kinematic constraint of the corner nodes at a plane element in a
median plane in an intern way. Three-dimensional curved structures may be analysed in this
way with sufficient accuracy.

In the case of twisted shell elements as well as geometrically non-linear analyses (twisted

2-24 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

elements are generated automatically with the latter), internal springs are used now instead
of the rotational stiffnesses mentioned in the previous paragraph. These springs convert the
moment loading of a node around the shell normal to axial forces in the shell. The shear
stiffness of the elements is modified slightly with this method, however, this is the only way to
achieve moment equilibrium at the nodes of three-dimensional curved structures.

2.8.6 Eccentrically Connected Shell Elements

In the case of T-beams, it is an advantage to lay all nodes in the plane of the top surface of the
plate and to connect the elements with different thicknesses eccentrically to this plane. Then
the T-beam effect is realized correctly.

The position of the elements is input in the program SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC (e.g. QUAD ...
POSI=BELO).

Example see csm32_slab_design.dat

2.8.7 Tendons in QUAD Elements

Prestressed tendons defined with the program TENDON have the same element number as the
QUAD element that contains them. They are characterised additionally with a cable number
and with construction stage numbers for installation, grouting and a possible removal. They
possess their own stiffness and are processed independently from the QUAD elements. Thus
not only the deflecting loads are applied to the structure, but also stress changes in the tendon
are calculated. The input occurs by the means of GRP CS.

In a CSM usage and CS>ICS1 also unbonded tendons get a stress change as bonded tendons
to get a loss of prestress due to creep and shrinkage. Also in case of stressing a second tendon
later, a first unbonded tendon shall get a stress loss as the slab gets shorter. Only in pure ASE
loadcases unbonded tendons are really unbonded.

On the problem of deviding primary and secondary (hyperstatic) effect of prestress see CSM
manual - CSM Design - primary and secondary (hyperstatic) effect of prestress
see also secondary_effect_of_prestress.dat

Prestressing cables in the QUAD elements can also be used in a geometrical nonlinear analy-
sis.

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=P3CO2oMjVds

2.8.8 Non-conforming Formulation

The 4-node element with QTYP-0 is characterised through only bilinear accretion of the dis-
placements and rotations. This accretion describes a uniform variation of the shear force and
of the bending moment via a transformation. This element is called conforming, because the
displacements and the rotations between elements do not have any jumps. The results at the
gravity centre of the element represent the actual internal force variation fairly well, whilst the
results at the corners are relatively useless, especially the ones at the edges or at the corners
of a region.

Taylor and Wilson came up with the idea to describe more stress states through additional func-
tions that value is zero at all nodes. As a rule, these functions lead to a substantial improvement
of the results, however, they violate the continuity of displacements between elements. Thus

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-25

ASE | Theoretical Principles

they are called non-conforming elements.

On the example of a membrane action the effect or the nonconforming shape functions can
be clarified best. In fig. 2.21 on top we see an element with QTYP 0 forced with a constand
inplane bending disc moment, applied with two pairs of membrane forces. The linear shape
functions only allow the plotted displacement. The high shear deformations attract a lot of
energy and so the element is much to stiff for this action.

On the bottom an element with nonconforming quadratic intern shape functions is shown. This
element can represent this action exactly without shear deformations and delivers a correct
stiffness.

Figure 2.21: on top element QTYP 0, bottom QTYP 1 with intern nonconforming shape functions

In ASE the more powerful QTYP 1 element is the default. With CTRL option QTYP the simple
element can be selected for special test cases.

QTYP 0 regular conforming element according to Hughes and Tezduyar [6] or Zienkiewicz
QTYP 1 non-conforming element with six functions based on Hughes and Tezduyar [6] or
Wilson (default value)

Elements of type 0 can describe only uniform moments and membrane forces inside them.
Elements of type 1 can describe a linear moment variation, if they are rectangular, whereas
a general quadrilateral element can only do that approximately. Membrane forces can vary
linearly.

More explanations of the element properties can also be found in the manual of the program
TALPA.

2.9 Volume Elements

The volume element (BRIC) represents an elastic body and it is defined by means of 8 nodes.
Even uniform bending states of a structure can be realized exactly via non-conforming accre-
tions using hexaeders.

For tetraeder, quadratic shape functions are added at the edges internally - see CTRL BRIC

2-26 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

4. Without these modes, tetraeder should not be used, as linear shape functions can not
represent a uniform bending states!

The intern used p-version shape functions can also have higher polynomial degree, see Fig.
2.22 and 2.23 but working with PLC primary loadcases only the quadratic edge modes are
used. For higher modes we do not have storage space in the database up to now. We also
found that the higher modes do not produce much more accuracy. So also for stress output it
is better to refine the mesh instead of using higher modes.

Figure 2.22: Tetraeder, edge modes polynom degree 2-3-4-5

Figure 2.23: Tetraeder, area mode polynom degree 2

In linear loadcases without PLC primary loadcase you can select a higher tetraeder polynomial
degree for educational purpose:

Control edge modes face modes gauss points

polynomial polynomial number
degree degree
ctrl bric 4 v4 1 2 - 5
ctrl bric 4 v4 2 3 - 11
ctrl bric 4 v4 3 3 2 11
ctrl bric 4 v4 4 4 2 14
ctrl bric 4 v4 5 5 2 24

With CTRL V5 you can control the use of higher modes e.g. at the contact to hexaeder.

To input hexaeder meshes:

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-27

ASE | Theoretical Principles

For a graphical input please use program WINTUBE. But you can also very easy extrude quad
areas to a hexaedral mesh - see example SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC e.g. hex_handle.dat

And also with pure SOFIMSHA simple structures can be created using hexaeder,
e.g. bric_bucl.dat, bric_input_m12.dat or more sofisticated water.dat

Material definitions:
Orthotropic material properties can be defined with the help of a meridian and a descend angle.

The following options are available depending on the license:

• Yield criteria for plastic analyses including analytical primary stress states
• Import of temperature fields from program HYDRA (they can be applied to the structure
as loading)

Material laws of AQUA-NMAT are implemented especially for tunnel analysis, e.g.:

• Mise-Drucker-Prager (also for steel) see bric_steel_van_mise.dat

• Mohr Coulomb
• Lade (for concrete) inclusive smeared reinforcement

Using material STEE also a trilinear work law can be used for brics, see, siehe example
bric_steel_trilinear_uniaxial_tension.dat

Concrete:

With a material input CONC the bric elements are only computed linear!

Figure 2.24: Concrete with material law LADE, biaxial strength

For a nonlinear analysis of concrete in BRICs, material LADE must be used.

Please watch the YOUTUBE video BRIC Concrete Triple Crack Model
https://youtu.be/mn65lu_oEVQ
Here a Triple Crack Modell is used. After the crack opening (when tensile strength is reached)

2-28 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

further strains work without poisson ratio (as in the quad concrete model). With this, a big
crack opening in one direction does not destroy the stresses in the other directions.

mue=0.2 mue=0.2

mue=0 mue=0

Figure 2.25: Starting with crack opening (below left), mue=0 is used! The two concrete blocks just
depart. The horizontal crack strain has no further effect on the vertical stress/strain.

Three cracks can occur in one element. They stand vertical to another. Damage parameters
of the descending part of the tensile strength (input P6) are transported to following loadcases
(load steps).
Example with bars made out of explicit beams: bric_concrete.dat
incl. parameters for different concrete grades C30-C100 - see plot of yielding curve in ASE

With the input of a smeared reinforcement (without explicit beams) you get the advantage of a
better convergence, as every bric element is stabilized with the reinforcement that lies inside
the bric (in the same way the nonlinear quad elements work). Also the input can be easier than
an input with explicit beams.
The tension stiffening effect (can be contolled with CTRL CONC C3) as well as a possible
yielding of the reinforcement is taken into account. A crack width can not be calculated due
to the local consideration. In Wingraf the reinforcement stresses can be plotted -> design
volume elements - nonlinear. With CTRL CONC V4 the pure concrete tensile strength (without
reinforcement can be reduced. On e.g. input CTRL CONC V4 1.90 the mimimum of 1.90 and
the strength given in the Lade input is used.

Smeared reinforcement: as you cannot give a material number for this reinforcement, a prede-
fined reinforcement is used. In SLS calculations (NSTR KSV SL) the reinforcement is limited
to 500 N/mm2, in ULS calculations (NSTR KSV SL) up to 500/1.15 N/mm2. With e.g. CTRL
CONC V10 400 a user defined value can be input (independant of SL,SLD,UL,ULD).

Example with smeared reinforcement: bric_smeared_cracked_girder.dat

Example with a circular reinforcement: volume_meshing_video.dat

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-29

ASE | Theoretical Principles

The following plot shows the stress in the smeared reinforcemet of example
bric_smeared_cracked_girder.dat. The stress in the web is higher because the low amout of
reinforcement has a higher tension stiffening effect:

Figure 2.26: Stress in the reinforcement in midspan (two span girder)

Calcutation of the smeared reinforcement in Brics:

for exemple group 48 = midspan bottom bric layer (thickness= height= 0.14m):
In this area 7 bars with diameter 28 exist = AS = 43.05 cm2
in an area of 0.80m*0.14m=0.112m2 -> ASO = AS/0.112m2 = 402.2 cm2/m2

With file bric_lade_yield_surface_plot.dat you can view the yield surface. The puncture point
of the xyz axis gives the uniaxial strength, a cut plane at the xy-plane gives the above shown
biaxial strength.

Figure 2.27: Material law LADE, thredimensional yield surface

WINGRAF results on LADE concrete anaylsis:

- results - volume elements - stresses (also 2D stresses are informative)

2-30 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

- results - volume elements - nonlinear results - plasticity : positive if yield surface triggered
- design - volume elements - non-linear results - reinforcement stress, concrete stress
- design - volume elements - non-linear results - crack direction 1-2-3 normalvector
- design - volume elements - non-linear results - Maximum scrack strain : strain after fctk peak

Figure 2.28: tension damage : strain after fctk peak

For TH2-TH3 usage see bric_th2.dat

2.10 Primary Load Cases

For the analysis of construction stages or for the definition of load steps in geometrical non-
linear analyses it is possible to use a previous load case. The parameters of the primary stress
state are defined group-wise for this purpose. A detailed description of the method is also
given in the TALPA manual.

In a normal construction stage analysis with CSM the following workflow is used:

The GRP factor FACL is set to 1.0. It generates the expansion loads from the primary stresses
σ,PLC - here the quad element would like to expand. If the stresses of the PLC together
with the loads of the PLC use FACL=FACP=1.0, then the system will remain in equilibrium
and no additional expansion or displacement is created. The FACL=FACP expansion loads of
the elements are then in equilibrium with the external loads (that are still active): here for a
vertically loaded quad element:

Figure 2.29: Load equilibrium when taking over the primary load case without new loads, but with
the old loads from the PLC that are still active

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-31

ASE | Theoretical Principles

The nodal load resulting from FACL and the element stress is generated because the element
wants expand due to the primary compressive stress.

Construction stages can be considered with different accuracies. The easiest way, of course, is
to analyse the construction stages with the respective structural system independently on each
other and then proceed with the superposition and the design of the structure. The different
statical systems can be selected through the assignment of the elements in groups.

ASE has, however, also a very efficient possibility to use stresses and deformations of a pri-
mary load case which allow the complete consideration of effects from creep or system change.
See also module CSM Construction stage manager.

During application the user must keep in mind that each stress state in a single element corre-
sponds to an external loading of the element and is in equilibrium with that loading.

ASE calculates now equivalent forces from the internal forces or stresses of the elements and
can apply them as loading (GRP...FACL). These forces create a deformation state which coun-
teracts the internal forces and makes them to zero when the statical system is not changed. If
a system change has taken place in the meanwhile or if these loads have been applied with
different factors, corresponding inherent stress states result.

Following principal cases have to be distinguished:

1. If the old loading is activated together with the primary state with a factor GRP...FACL=1.0,
new loads do not result. The stresses remain the same, the deformations are zero. Ac-
cording to SYST...PLC the total deformations or at SYST...PLC=0 only the addition defor-
mations are output.
2. If only the primary state is applied as loading with a factor GRP ... FACL=0, the resultant
loading is the primary load case with inverted sign. This gives rise to unloading defor-
mations that generate a stress state which becomes zero together with the primary stress
state in the case of free deformability. This FACL=0 method should only be used in special
cases. FACL=1 is the usual default.

A graphical explanation to this can also be found in figure 2.36 :taking over the primary load
case

If some elements are removed from the system of the primary stress state along with their
corresponding loads, the initial equilibrium is disturbed and forces arise at the boundary nodes
of the removed parts. The remaining elements expand to the direction of the removed parts. If
the primary state is generated analytically, the removed parts do not have to be defined once,
because all necessary information can be extracted from the remaining elements.

Using ECHO LOAD EXTR one can obtain an output of the internally generated loading at every
node. This option should be used generally during analyses with primary states, because it
is the best means for tracking down errors in the description of the states. The really applied
nodal loads (nodal load vectors) can be represented with the program WinGRAF.

Further instructions can be found in the description of the record GRP in the TALPA manual or
in the examples.
See also figure 2.36 :taking over the primary load case

2-32 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

2.11 Non-linear Analyses

Non-linear effects can be analysed only with iterations. This is done in ASE usually with a
modified Newton method with constant stiffness matrix. The advantages of the method are
that the stiffness matrix does not need to be decomposed more than once and that the system
matrix remains always positive definite. The speed of the method is increased through an
accelerating algorithm written by Crisfield. This method notices the residual forces developing
during the iterations and calculates the coefficients e and f for the displacement increments of
the current and the previous step. A damping of the method can be specified in the case of
critical systems (SYST...FMAX<1.0).

For a geometric nonlinear analsis a Line Search technique with an update of stiffness is used
- see CTRL ITER.

Examples see -> Summary of example overviews

Following non-linear effects are implemented currently: please also refer to NSTR in section
3.40:

• Spring elements (failure, yield, slip, friction, work laws)

• QUAD foundation elements (failure, yield, slip, friction)
• Cable elements ( compression failure, material work laws)
• Truss elements (tension failure, material work laws)
• Nonlinear bedding for PILE elements
• Nonlinear beam elements
• Non-linear material laws for QUAD and BRIC elements
• Geometrically non-linear analyses for all elements, cable sag, membranes

Tendons defined in the QUAD elements with the program TENDON can be used only in geo-
metrically linear analysis.

For TRUS, SPRI, CABL, BEAM, QUAD and BRIC in a geometrically non-linear analysis the
initial stress matrix is added to the stresses of the primary stress state (for TRUS, SPRI and
CABL without reference to a primary stress state, the prestress from the program SOFIMSHA/-
SOFIMSHC is used for this purpose - see CTRL CABL). Thereby the iterations are markedly
more stable when referring to a primary load case and the ultimate load can be calculated more
precisely. A stability failure is recognized also in this way, even in the cases without unplanned
initial deformation (an unstable system is reported, if the stresses of the primary state exceed
the buckling load, i.e. the total stiffness matrix is negative). Since it is reported here, that the
PLC was actually unstable, this feature is only meaningful in the case of small load steps.

A module for the ultimate load calculation ULTI increases or decreases the load step-by-step
until it reaches a still sustained loading.

Initial deformations of the structure can be read as results of already analysed load cases
with the record SYST...PLC...FACV. With GRP...FACL=0 the initial deformation is applied with-
out stresses. This can also be done more clearly with OBLI (the OBLI oblique position or
predeformation can also be mixed with a primary stress state SYST PLC). In the stored re-
sults, the initial deformation is added to the incremental displacements of the actual loadcase.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-33

ASE | Theoretical Principles

With CTRL DIFF the increment can be stored separately. Deformations from a modal analy-
sis (bucling eigenvalue) can be used as initial deformation via scaling with FACV or OBLI see
ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat task (ULTI iteration ... with predeformation)

Non-linear analyses are not possible with the basic version.

2.12 Non-linear Analysis of Plates and Shells

2.12.1 Overview
Material nonlinear analysis on SYST NMAT YES for quad elements only work with material
concrete, steel or textile.

To analyze a masonary or rock wall nonlinear, a concrete material with modified worklaw must
be used.

Example Input file

Concrete a1_introduction_example.dat
Steel ase12_buckling_slab.dat
Ulimate load - verification nonlinear_quad_concrete_beam.dat
pdf for that nonlinear_quad_concrete_beam.pdf
Wall disk concrete_wall.dat
Arch pure concrete arch_bridge.dat
Steel_fibre_concrete steel_fibre_concrete.dat
Sector tank concrete_tank_cracked.dat
Fire design quads_on_fire_1.dat
pdf for that quads_on_fire_1_english.pdf
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QsGEUu1UGEU

The relaxation in individual layers, due to former plastification, is considered by consistently

saving the results in all the layers of the elements (hysteresis effect for the bending of plates).
This could create residual stresses over the cross-sectional height, even after total relaxation.

By means of the concrete law one can even consider creep and shrinkage effects for a cracked
shell-element (The redistribution of stress, from concrete to the reinforced steel, due to creep
and shrinkage), see program CSM.

2.12.2 Input of the Materials

ASE can evaluate an analysis for either the working- or the failure-stress level. It is advisable
to use the option ECHO MAT YES in ASE, which checks the material values. The really used
stress-strain curves of the material are plotted then and the significant values are printed.

Examples for a free work law input:

2-34 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Work law input Input file

Spring work law a1_spring_overview.dat
.z.B. kinematic hardening spring_law_3_pkin.dat
Concrete work law steel_fibre_concrete.dat
Steel work law ase12_buckling_slab.dat
Layer Sperrholzplatte ase.dat/english/special/timber_quad_layer.dat
Layer Hohlkörperbeton bubble_deck.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

Stress-strain curves for concrete:

sig-u (red) Stress-strain-curve for the cross section design (parabola-rectangle-

diagram)
sig-r (blue) Stress-strain-curve for non-linear methods of the determination of in-
ternal forces and moments
sig-m (green) Stress-strain-curve for non-linear methods of deformation analysis

Figure 2.30: AQUA plot of the standard stress-strain curves for concrete

Stress-strain curves for reinforcement:

Figure 2.31: AQUA plot of the standard stress-strain curves for reinforcement

Following requirements are to be considered for the input of the stress-strain curve type in

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-35

ASE | Theoretical Principles

order to select the correct curve during calculation in ASE with record NSTR. The stress-strain
curve for concrete as well as for steel is defined with the item KSV in record NSTR and without
the input for KSB. If a stress-strain curve is defined for KSV and for KSB, KSV sets the curve
for concrete and KSB for the reinforcement. In this way arbitrary combinations are possible.

Types and designations of the stress-strain curves in AQUA and ASE

Designation of the stress-strain Type in AQUA record SSLA Selection in ASE NSTR
curve without/with safety coefficient
sig-u (red): design ULTI UL / ULD
sig-r (blue): non-linear internal CALC CAL / CALD
forces and moments
sig-m (green): non-linear SERV SL / SLD
deformations

Following AQUA input defines a new serviceability stress-strain curve for concrete as well as
for reinforcement with the safety 1.3:

!– Input of an example stress-strain curve for serviceability limit state:

SSLA SERV 1.3 ! first SSLA record defines the type of the stress-strain curve
! The value after type of the stress-strain curve sets the corresponding
! safety coefficient
SSLA EPS SIG TYPE
0.30 0.0 ! tensile zone
0.09 2.1
0 0 !-------------
-1.1 -17.8 spl
-2.0 -24.0 spl
-3.5 -23.0 ! compression zone
-4.5 0
!—————- reinforcement: ——————————–
STEE 2 BST 500SA
!– Input of an example stress-strain curve for serviceability limit state: -
SSLA SERV 1.3 ! first SSLA record defines the type of the stress-strain curve
! The value after type of the stress-strain curve sets the corresponding
! safety coefficient
SSLA EPS SIG TYPE=POL
-50 -525 ! compression zone
-25 -525
-2.3 -500
0 0 !-------------
2.3 500
25 525 ! tensile zone
50 525

The stress-strain curves which are input in this way can be seen and checked as modified
serviceability stress-strain curve (sig-m / green) in the AQUA output of the material values and

2-36 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

in the plot of the stress-strain curves:

Figure 2.32: AQUA plot with manually defined stress-strain curve sig-m (green) for concrete

Temporary Material Control Parameters in ASE

In ASE record CTRL item CONC there are extended input possibilities for the material law for
non-linear reinforced concrete. On the one hand the control parameters can be input here
for consideration of the multiaxial stress state. On the other hand a temporary modification of
the in AQUA defined material values FCT and FCTK, which is only valid in the current ASE
calculation, can be done here also.

Selection of a Stress-Strain Curve for an ASE Calculation

The selection of a preset or manually defined stress-strain curve is done with an input in the
ASE record NSTR (items KSV and /or KSB). Possible temporarily different inputs for the con-
crete tensile strengths and the consideration of the multiaxial stress state can be done with
record CTRL CONC.

Check of the Material Values in ASE

In order to increase the transparency of the calculation the material values and further defi-
nitions for the non-linear material law which is in each case used in the calculation are also
output in ASE. For this purpose it is necessary to set ECHO MAT YES. Then it follows here a
definition of the analysis method for consideration of the crack widths and the tension stiffening
as well as the output of all relevant parameters. In addition a presentation of the actually used
stress-strain curves of the materials as well as a detailed plot of the concrete stress-strain
curve in tensile zone are printed in the URSULA output.

Figure 2.33: Detailed plot of the tensile zone of the concrete stress-strain curve in ASE

For laminated timber or laminated glass calculations a QUAD element can be defined about

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-37

ASE | Theoretical Principles

the height also with variable material composition. The materials for the individual layers
are saved at first in AQUA how usual in separate material numbers. Then FLAY is used to
define a composite material, which is input according to the layer arrangement. First the
layer-thicknesses T are defined, which are then followed by the respective material numbers:
1st Layer T = 6 mm thick out of material 11,
2nd Layer T = 3 mm thick out of material 12 etc... :

PROG AQUA
MATE 11 E 60e3 MUE 0.2 $ glass $
MATE 12 E 0.8e3 MUE 0.3 $ plastic $
$ glass-plastic-glass $
FLAY NO 1 T 0.006 11
T 0.003 12
T 0.003 12
T 0.003 12
T 0.006 11
END

Figure 2.34: Heterogeneous Layers

The intermediate layers t2+t3 were defined only for a more clear output! The layer material No.
1 can be used only for QUAD elements.

Example FLAY input see bubble_deck.dat

or for a timber slab: timber_quad_layer.dat

The layer composition may also be unsymmetric. Then excentricity parts appear in the 8*8
material matrix D (D16:D18 ,D26:D28 ,D36:D38). The 8*8 material matrix D is printed in the
report and contains also an info, which shear modulus input is used for which effect, see repot
in example timber_quad_layer.dat. Furthermore the main bending direction alpha is printed in
the legend. In this direction also the main shear stiffness is assumed.

Note: The analysis is according to plate theory, i.e. assuming that the cross-section does not
have planar deformation! The displacement of the plates between each other is not taken into
account. For this one would have to couple the plates with springs!

This model is not suited for the analysis of local failure at the coupling points of laminated
glass plates, because for such an analysis the planar deformation of the cross-sections is very
important. At these points one could evaluate a spatial stress-state, which can only be depicted
by volume elements.

Any arbitrary material can be used basically also orthotropic as layer for non-linear analyses.

2-38 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.35: Laminated plate

At the moment only layers from the material concrete or steel are processed non-linearly. The
loading and unloading curve is generated independent on each other (hysteresis).

2.12.3 Analysis Basics

Linear Analysis
Bending

The total moment of inertia of a layered element is made up by the sum of each layer’s moment
of inertia and the Steiner-part of the individual layers. Here an eccentricity of the centroid’s po-
sition could be created due to stiffer layers on one side of the element, e.g. sandwich-element
with different top-layer thicknesses. The eccentricity is established automatically and is con-
sidered for simple plate bending, it also leads the correct length deformation of the elements.
This effect also becomes apparent for an eccentric connection with a homogeneous element.

The input of orthotropic materials is not allowed, due to the occurrence of various eccentricities
in various directions. This is blocked by the program and leads to an error message.

Linear normal-stresses in the layers are generated by the strains in the layers. They are calcu-
lated as usual by the stress-strain matrix D of the material in a layer:

δσ = D · δϵ (2.39)

where the matrix D can also be orthotropic.

The linear total stress is made up of all the stress components including the allowed factors
out of the ASE-GRP input:

σ = FACL · FCREEP2 · σ,PLC +

+ FACS · FCREEP1 · D · (δϵ + ϵ,LOAD ) + σ (2.40)

with:

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-39

ASE | Theoretical Principles

σ,PLC Primary stress (initial stress)

FACL Factor of the primary stress record ASE-GRP
FACS Factor of the stiffness record ASE-GRP
FCREEP1 Stiffness reduction creep and shrinkage without PLC
FCREEP1 = 1 / (1+PHI) with PHI from record ASE-GRP
FCREEP2 Reduction of the primary stress through creep and shrinkage, by taking
over the primary load case with ro and dphi from record GRP
FCREEP2 = 1 - dphi/(1 + ro·dphi))
(dphi = creep increment of a creep step component)
ε,LOAD Load expansion (temperature or expansion load)
σ Pre-stress (record GRP-PREX)

In a normal construction stage analysis with CSM the following workflow is used:

The GRP factor FACL is set to 1.0. It generates the expansion loads from the primary stresses
σ,PLC - here the quad element would like to expand. If the stresses of the PLC together
with the loads of the PLC use FACL=FACP=1.0, then the system will remain in equilibrium
and no additional expansion or displacement is created. The FACL=FACP expansion loads of
the elements are then in equilibrium with the external loads (that are still active): here for a
vertically loaded quad element:

Figure 2.36: Load equilibrium when taking over the primary load case without new loads, but with
the old loads from the PLC that are still active

The nodal load resulting from FACL and the element stress is generated because the element
wants expand due to the primary compressive stress.

The internal forces and moments are calculated by integrating the stresses in the layers, over
the element thickness of each layer.

Shear

Initially the shear stiffnesses of the individual layers are summed up for the stiffness determi-

2-40 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

nation.

The following equation is used to calculate the shear stress from the shear force q.
q · S
τ = (2.41)
·b

For homogenous material definitions, in the linear domain, this would result in a parable-
shaped shear stress distribution over the height of the element, with the maximum value of
τm = 1.5 · q/ h. For sandwich elements, with thick (strong) top-layers, it would mean that a
nearly constant shear stress is present in the middle of the element; given by τm = 1.0 · q/ h
(h=element thickness).

2.12.4 Steel plates

Example see ase12_buckling_slab.dat

For a non-linear analysis, the calculation of the new linear stresses is initially made by assum-
ing a linear material behaviour for every layer xi. The following applies when proceeding with
the primary load case:

σ = σ,PLC + D · dϵ (2.42)

and

τ = τ,PLF + dτ (2.43)

(simplified)

The total stress σ is therefore not just put together by the total strain multiplied with the
stiffness, instead it might be that the non-linear eigen-stresses of the individual layers of σ,PLC
have to be considered. For the consistent treatment of the problem, including the correct
generation of the loading- and unloading curves of the layer model, it is of importance that not
only the internal forces and moments are stored in the database, but also all the stress in all the
layers and all the Gauss-points. This information is needed for the next load case as σ,PLC .

From these initial linear stresses a new linear comparison stress is calculated:
For QUAD elements the following applies:
r
σ = σ2 + σy2 − σ · σy + 3τy
2 + 3τ 2 + 3τ 2
 y
(2.44)

where τy = disc shear and τ , τy = plate shear perpendicular to the plate.

If the so calculated linear comparison stress σ, is above the allowed stress (by considering
the hardening, which is calculated by summing up the plastic strains, by entering a trilinear
stress-strain curve); then first of all the linear component is established (Break-through point
through the plastic area). Then the remaining strain increment δdε with the elastoplastic
material matrix D-P is applied incrementally, with the consideration of possible hardening. The
non-linear relaxation lies on the surface of the plastic area. The number of plastic increments
of the strain increment can be changed in the input CTRL MSTE. The non-linear material
behaviour is according to the elasto-plastic plastic-law, described in TALPA, which is according
to van MISE and includes hardening. For more information on this topic you are referred to
Zienkiewicz [10].

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-41

ASE | Theoretical Principles

The following diagram results from uniaxial stress:

Figure 2.37: Uniaxial stress

Plastification number:
In WINGRAF you can plot a plastification number f. This is similar to the f-value for soil me-
chanical yielding (AQUA-VMIS) and indicates a reference to the yielding limit fy:

ƒ = (σ ner − ƒ y)/ ƒ y (2.45)

where σ linear is calcualted from the strain using a linear E modulus (E*ε).
Example steel with fy=500 N/mm2 E=200000 N/mm2 :

ε-x = 1.25 o/oo -> σ linear = 250 N/mm2 -> f= = negative = still in the linear region
-0.5
ε-x = 2.50 o/oo -> σ linear = 500 N/mm2 -> f=. = just at the yielding limit
0.0
ε-x = 3.75 o/oo -> σ linear = 750 N/mm2 -> f= = positive = in the nonlinear region
+0.5

In the case of combined stress, which is made up of normal stress (N/ A± M/ ) and shear force
stress, it is assumed that on reaching the elasticity limit (plastic area) the shear stress (from the
shear force) remains constant and can not be increased any further through hardening. The
thus established shear force stress is then basically substituted as a constant component into
the calculation of the comparison stress. It has started to plasticising. This would then lead
to the following: e.g. in plate bending; the shear stresses in the plastified plate edge would
not increase anymore, however in the middle of the plate they would still get bigger, this in
turn would cause a deviation from the parable-shaped shear stress distribution over the plate
thickness, which would in turn cause a concentration of the shear stresses in the middle of the
plate.

2.12.5 Concrete
Examples see ase.dat\...\nonlinear_quad\ a1_introduction_example.dat The following litera-
ture was consulted on the concrete material law: Stempniewski and Eibl [11], Feenstra and
De Borst [12], and Schiessel [13]

2-42 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Following current assessments and explanations are mentioned here additionally: xx [14],
Zilch and Rogge [15], Bellmann and Rötzer [16], xx [17], and Schneider [18]

The material behaviour of reinforced concrete can be described by the following properties:

• Non-linear stress-strain curve in tension and compressive zone

• Contribution of the concrete between cracks (tension stiffening)
• Non-linear material behaviour of the steel inserts
• Simplified check of the plate’s shear stress
• ASE performs a nonlinear analysis with a given reinforcement. An increase of reinforce-
ment can be controlled via REIQ-CHKR.

Usual procedure:

The element is subdivided into NLAY layers. The stresses sigma-x, sigma-y and tau-xy and
the principal stresses sigma-I and sigma-II are calculated for every layer’s boundary. For each
principal stress direction a stress-strain curve is generated, which results from the principal
stress relation in the respective direction. The thus established non-linear stresses are then
integrated over all the layers to find the internal forces. After this all the forces of the reinforce-
ment including the tension-stiffening-effect are added. Finally an independent check is made
for the plate’s shear stresses.

The following is a list of the concrete parameters taken from record CONC:

CONC-FC = calculation value of the concrete stiffness

CONC-FCT = average tension stiffness for tension stiffening
CONC-FCTK = lower fractile of the tension stiffness for bare concrete
CONC-GC = GC compression fracture energy
CONC-GF = GF tension fracture energy
CONC-MUEC = friction value in the crack splice

Further inputs in ASE:

LC - BET2 = load duration coefficient (beta2)

CTRL - NLAY = number of layers to be calculated >=6,
default = 10

Analysis on Serviceability Stress Level

Using the 1.0-times serviceability loads the maximum desired stress is input for this serviceabil-
ity state at the material. The deformation and crack width to be expected is in this case mostly
interesting. The input of the concrete tensile strength of the (pure) concrete layer is particularly
important. This value is input in AQUA in CONC...FCTK and it can be modified subsequently
temporarily in ASE with CTRL CONC V3+V4. The serviceability stress-strain curve without
any additional material safeties is requested then in ASE (NSTR KSV SL = default).

The selection of a realistic concrete tensile strength fctk (pure strength without reinforcement)
is here very important. If fctk or CTRL CONC V4 is not input, the plate remains in uncracked

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-43

ASE | Theoretical Principles

state I. It can be therefore reasonable to decrease the value e.g. onto 60 % in order to con-
sider a crack predamage from construction stage (hydration heat). On the other hand realistic
deflections are resulted often only with a high initial value for fctk.

Analysis with gamma-times Loads

If using gamma-times loads the corresponding material stress-strain curve has to be selected
in record NSTR in ASE. There are two possibilities that are also well shown in the beam
example aseaqb_1_column_cracked.dat :

• Analysis according to "non-linear method": Here an averaged material safety of 1.3 is used.
The material strengths are modified for this purpose. They are available AQUA and can be
requested in ASE with NSTR KSV CALD.
• Analysis in ultimate limit state NSTR KSV ULD

In both cases the pure concrete alone must include any tensile strengths. CTRL CONC V4 0.0
or 0.01 must be input!

The increase of the steel stress due to the concrete action between the cracks may be brought
into approach (default for fct or CTRL CONC V3).

A non-linear analysis for the ultimate limit state is particularly necessary for additional effects
from second-order theory. Such an analysis with temporarily switched-off tensile strength of
the pure concrete causes however often big deformations and bad convergences.

A reasonable procedure is therefore often also a determination of the internal forces and mo-
ments with average values of the material strengths (analysis in serviceability limit state) and a
definitive design of the redistributed internal forces and moments with an average load safety
coefficient (e.g. 1.45)
Futher explanations see example a2_nonlinear_slab.dat

Non-linear Stress-Strain Curve in the Compressive Zone

The maximum concrete compression strength beta-ic, found in the compressive zone, is re-
duced from the principal stress relation. Beta-ic can either be read from the Kupfer curve, or it
can be calculated by the respective equations [ 1] , pg. 260.

2-44 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.38: Biaxial failure curve according to Kupfer-Hilsdorf-Ruesch

With this maximum value beta-ic an uniaxial stress-strain line can be generated according to
the concrete stress-strain curve for every of both principal stress directions.

An increase value higher than 1.0 is only allowed for calculations in serviceability limit state.
For calculations with gamma-times loads (ultimate limit state) this increase is deactivated in
the default, because it is mostly desired that the maximum stress increases about the basic
value of the concrete compressive strength beta-ic - see CTRL CONC V2.

A reduction of the permissible compressive stresses due to lateral tension (and lateral cracks)
is taken into account and can be adapted with CTRL CONC V6. The maximum reduction is
reached with a transverse tension stress of fctk (or at least -0.05*fcm) and remains on this level
also on higher tensile strains.

In case the maximum concrete compression strength is modified, the work law must be
adapted. To keep the start E modulus as well as the strain for max. strength, the worklay
is compressed from 0.0-1.0 permille strain and lengthened in 1.5-2.5 permille.

Tensile zone

In the tensile zone of concrete, the maximum value beta-z, is always taken as the lower fractile
of the concrete stiffness fctk. The length of the descending curve results from the tension crack
energy GF of the processing zone. Typical values lie between 0.10 and 0.25 Nmm/mm2 . The
program restricts the length of the descending curve to 5·epslin - see CTRL CONC VAL.

If a stress-strain curve for concrete is already defined in the tensile zone in AQUA, then this one
is used instead of the here described program-internal curve! Thus it is possible to calculated
steel fibre concrete -> steel_fibre_concrete.dat

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-45

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Figure 2.39: Uniaxial stress-strain curve for the tensile zone

The element is seen as cracked as soon as the tensile-strain crosses the linear limit value
of epslin. Any further strain is stored as plastic tensile-strain and is taken into account for
reloading after an element has been unloaded (hysteresis). Due to the possibility of excessive
tensile stiffness perpendicular to the first crack, the program has to store two plastic tensile-
strains at each point (first crack and second crack).

It could be that a crack has already emerged when a primary load case is taken over. In
this case the fixed crack direction of the primary load case is used for the calculation of the
stresses. For this calculation the strains in the direction of the crack and perpendicular to it are
used. When a possible shear stress is present at the crack it is lowered by a simple friction
consideration (Crack-toothing input with AQUA-CONC-MUEC).

In case the primary load case was cracked and the tensile strain goes back to 0 again, ASE
does not only goes back to the (0,0) stress point but takes into account a remaining strain of
the crack zone. So a cracked girder remains a little bit curved after unloading.
This is done by going back not to (0,0) but to a so called compression zero point. In ASE this
point lies at 80% of eps-z (eps-z = strain reaching tensile strength). From there (0.8*eps-z,0)
again compression can develop.

Reinforcement

The program takes the defined reinforcement as the default reinforcement. The non-linear
analysis is then performed for the default reinforcement. An automatic increase in lacking
structural safety does not take place! It is therefore the users responsibility to check the cer-
tainty of the convergence of the analysis! Possible residual forces of the non-linear iteration
have to be checked. Since these residual forces are stored as support forces they can be
checked with the program WinGRAF, this is done by generating a plot of the support forces.
During a plate analysis residual forces are also generated in the plate’s plane (normal forces),
this is because the program needs to find equilibrium of the normal stresses.

The reinforcement parameters and a given minimum reinforcement is taken from BEMESS-
PARA or from the corresponding SSD design parameter dialog. REIQ is used to import a
reinforcement from a previously generated BEMESS-analysis. The recommended method is
used in the example a2_nonlinear_slab.dat . An analysis can also be made with non-reinforced
concrete, when no reinforcement is defined. Further information on the program ASE can be
found in the chapter ’Definition of Reinforcement’ as well as the latest TEDDY-Help .

The consideration of the tension stiffening is done generally with a modification of the steel

2-46 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

stress-strain curve described in [ 2] page 269. Since ASE 11.76-21 the consideration in ser-
viceability limit state (NSTR SL/SLD) occurs according to the method of Schießl (DAfStB Heft
400) or EC 2, because more realistic deformation values result here. For the ultimate limit state
and the non-linear determination of the internal forces and moments (NSTR UL/ULD or CAL/-
CALD) the consideration of the tension stiffening is done according to the simplified method
of the modified steel strains according to DAfStB Heft 525 / Heft 600. For a better clarity the
in each case used method in ASE is output again at the non-linear properties of the plane
elements.

Please note, that the serviceability analysis (NSTR KSV SL) should be done usually according
to Heft 400 also for DIN 1045-1 and respectively acc. EN 1992-1-1, because it leads to a better
agreement with the test result according our experiences.

Figure 2.40: Tensile stiffening acc. to Heft 525 picture H 8-4 and Heft 600 picture H5-11

As the pure concrete layers also work in tension, the following working method is used:

• In a first step the strains in the steel layers in reinforcement direction are determined. These
strains are equal to the mean steel strains εsm according to Schiessel [13].
• Using the tensile working law the two majoring strains I and II are determined based on the
actual tensile strength amd the process zone length LZ (see below):
I: average strain when cracking starts
II: average strain for finished crack development = at the end of the decreasing part of the
tensile work law
• The streel stress is now calculated as follows:
– In interval 0-I the steel stress is linear, concrete works linear.
– In interval I-II the additional strain due to tension stiffening is interpolated linear. Con-
crete descends linear.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-47

ASE | Theoretical Principles

– After II the full effect of tension stiffening is applied, concrete stress is 0. Reaching the
steel yielding point a trilinear part follows,e.g. the steel working law is used.
• The process zone length LZ is calculated as follows:
example EC=27700 GF_ASE=0.3 fctk=3.71: (EC=tangent at start of stress-strain curve)
Process zone length LZ = GF_ASE*EC/FCTK/FCTK = 0.3*27.7/3.71/3.71 = 0.605 m
In case you use GF in AQUA please notice that ASE internally uses a GF_ASE =
0.35*GF_AQUA. This correction is done to get better results compared to in situ defor-
mations. In reality cracks that occur at the surface quicker develop to the inside of a slab
due to stress range effects.
In SOFiSTiK this length is limited to 0.400 m, because otherwise an FCTK of e.g. 0.5
N/mm2 would result in a very long and unrealistic length. In ”Finite Elemente im Stahlbeton
- Betonkalender 1993/I Stempniewski” a value between 200-600 mm is recommended.
• With this process zone length LZ and GF_ASE a crack opening delta= 2 * GF_ASE / FCTK
can be calculated. With eps=delta/LZ the length of the descending part will be DEPSX=
0.404 promille (relative to LZ). This value is then limited to 5*length of the increasing part =
5*0.134 - not controlling here. This strain DEPSX is used in ASE for the plot of the stress
strain curve – that means for an element with the element gauss point size LZ.
• In the real analysis now this strain DEPSX= 0.404 promille is scaled to the actual element
gauss point size.
e.g. element area = 0.05m*0.05m = 0.0025m2 = per gauss point 0.000625m2 -> element
gauss point size L_Gauss = squareroot(0.000625m2) = 0.025m.
– For an actual element with L_Gauss > LZ, DEPSX_GAUSS is calculated to
DEPSX_GAUSS = DEPSX*LZ/L_Gauss (descending part is shortened).
– For an actual element with L_Gauss < LZ, DEPSX_GAUSS = DEPSX. That means that
the descending part will not be elongated!
So for an element size of 0.05m*0.05m a descending part of DEPSX_GAUSS = DEPSX =
0.404 promille is taken into account.
• For the new design codes (and without the input of CTRL CONC V5 400) the crack width
is then calculated according to DIN 1045.1 11.2.4 or according to the Eurocode equation.
The average force of the steel insert is calculated by multiplying the steel stress for the
crack cross section in the cracked condition (state II) σs with the reinforced concrete area.
This value is added to the concrete’s internal forces and moments.
The crack widths are first calculated in the direction of the reinforcements using the eu-
ropean coefficients according EN 1992-1-1 7.3.4(1) inclusive equation 7.14. If the crack
direction is not perpendicular to the reinforcement, the crack distance and the crack width
are modified according to EN 1992-I-I 7.3.4(4).
For non-reinforced elements it is only possible to calculate the crack direction, but the crack
width can not be established. To get an acceptable plot in WINGRAF, a fiktive reinforcement
is assumed and with this a crack width is calculated. But this crack width is only qualitativ,
not qantitative.
For steel fibre concrete without additional reinforcement the crack distance es fixed to 140
mm. For steel fibre concrete with real reinforcement a correction factor 1-alfaf is taken into
account (DAfStb-Richtlinie for steel fibre concrete, DIN EN 1992-1-1, new text (R.6)P and

2-48 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

(R.7)P).

The coefficient describing the connection properties is to be defined in AQUA-STEE. The factor
for the influence of the load period is input in ASE-LC.

For ultimate limit state the calculation is done according to Heft 525 / Heft 600, if DIN 1045-1,
DIN FB 102 or EN 1992-1-1 is set.

Shear force

The shear stresses for the concrete law are not calculated for each layer, as is the case for the
plastic yield criteria of STEEL, instead a simple shear limitation of the shear force is set with
an assumed shear stress in the cracked condition (state II) of

τ = q/ z = q/ (0.8 · h) (2.46)

where h represents average of all the reinforcement layers.

If the linear calculated shear stress τ rises over the shear resistance, the shear force is reduced
accordingly and the element gets plastic shear deformations. By default the shear resistance
is the bond stress FBD from AQUA. It can be changed with ASE-CTRL FRIC in N/mm2 . Then
with TAU2...V2 a descending part with a final strength can be defined.

The shear limitation is only calculated for the centre of gravity. Then it is proportionally assigned
to all the Gauss points.

If a BEMESS calculation with punching occurs before the non-linear ASE calculation, then a
check of the shear stresses in ASE is not done in the areas of the punching point. In fine
meshes around a punching node also the support force is distributed to round up the bending
(peak smoothing see following chapter and CTRL BETO V7).

If this is not the case or if the permissible shear stress is exceeded at other singular points, an
undesirable shear plasticity can be switched off with an increase of CTRL TAU2 onto e.g. 9.9
N/mm2 if required. Then a shear or punching check has to be done however separately.

Procedure of a Reinforced Concrete Plate Analysis

Usually the system is to be defined as a three-dimensional system, this is because the crack
opening will cause horizontal node displacements, even in the plate analysis. For the special
case of a reinforced-concrete plate analysis the system can also be entered as a girder grid
SYST ROST - the program will then automatically introduce a horizontal statically determinate
support.

The first step would involve a linear analysis of the individual load cases, a superposition of
the load cases and a reinforced concrete design calculation of the linear internal forces and
moments. BEMESS will store the required reinforcement dimensions under the design case
number 1 (see BEMESS-CTRL-LCR).

Subsequently a state load case has to be put together for the non-linear analysis. For the
calculation of long-term deformations the load case components consist of self weight and a
portion of the imposed load. A linear analysis of this load case is made, which is needed as a
comparative reference later on. Now the non-linear analysis of this load case, under a different
load case number and with a predefined reinforcement, is calculated (design parameter from

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-49

ASE | Theoretical Principles

BEMESS-PARA and input for ASE-REIQ).

The convergence of this non-linear analysis needs to be checked. The program finds a stable
solution for the case where the energy remains the same (Energy convergence). Varying
residual forces might occur due to inadequate convergence in the normal force directions.
These are generally not of importance, but should be checked with WinGRAF...nodes...residual
forces.

The first load case of the non-linear analysis is usually calculated by excluding creep and
shrinkage. Subsequently another non-linear calculation is made, including creep and shrink-
age, under a different load case number. This is done so that the different effects can be
compared and evaluated. It is also advisable to generate several calculations where the con-
crete stiffness FCTK is altered, due to the fact that this parameter has a significant impact on
the entire analysis.

The entire analysis should then be verified with the following load case results:

• linear analysis of the state load case

• non-linear analysis without creep and shrinkage
• non-linear analysis with creep and shrinkage

Definition of the Reinforcement

The input REIQ...LCR...FACT is used to take over the reinforcement from the design load case
LCR, generated in BEMESS, with a factor FACT. But the amount of reinforcement is limited by
a minimum and maximum value, defined in the design parameters in BEMESS-PARA or the
SSD design parameter dialogue box.

A minimum reinforcement is applied also without a REIQ input.

The new reinforcement is saved under the design load case LCRS (default LCRS=99) and can
or should be visualized and checked with WinGRAF.

2.12.6 Rounding off over Punching Points

Enhanced computation on singular support points in the material non-linear concrete analysis
(SYST NMAT YES):
Following problem exists: Such singular supports caused singular forces that could not be car-
ried in the concrete non-linear material model, especially in combination with singular rotational
constraints.

At punching nodes from BEMESS now a first singular support or connection force (and bending
moment) will be distributed on neighbouring nodes inside the column perimeter to simulate a
constant distributed support pressure. Thus the feature only works after a BEMESS ultimate
design with PUNC YES or PUNC CHEK! The support force of the centre is distributed via an
internal coupling ring around the centre node and elastic springs to further nodes inside the
column area.

The processing is documented in the statistic print out "rounding singular punching nodes". It
can be switched off with CTRL CONC V7 0. It only works on BEMESS punching nodes but
also if they come from beam connections in a 3D analysis. It also converts singular connec-
tion bending moments in a triangular connection pressure. The effect can be studied well by

2-50 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

comparing a run with CTRL CONC V7 0 and a run with CTRL CONC V7 1.

Especially at fine discretized punching points a rotational constraints will be analyzed more
realistic (stronger). On such points the singular support moment caused a strong singular
curvature in the fine mesh and thus a lower constraint.

In a material linear analysis this feature is switched off by default, but can be enforced with
CTRL CONC V7 1.

2.12.7 Output of the Results

Graphical Representation
The graphical output of the results over the thickness of the QUAD elements is another side
effect of the consistent saving of the results in all the layers. The ANIMATOR can be used for
the visualization of the results (choose a loadcase and double klick an element). The following
picture shows the stresses in a single QUAD element. The element is a sandwich element,
where the soft inner layer is covered by two harder top-layers.

Figure 2.41: Element info

The next picture shows the non-linear stresses in a concrete arched shell. Here the cracks
can be seen in the tensile zone. The thin lines are the stresses in the reinforcement layers.
The significant numerical values, e.g. the maximum steel stress, are output in addition in the

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-51

ASE | Theoretical Principles

dialogue box.

Example tunnel shell quads_on_fire_2.dat

Figure 2.42: Visualization of the non-linear results

The visualization of the non-linear results from the steel and concrete law is still possible with
WinGRAF, e.g. the visualization of the crack distribution at the underside of a plate, like in
example of the reinforced concrete slab in cracked condition.

Numerical output of the Results

The entire non-linear results, like the crack widths or stresses in the cracked condition (state
II), can only be released numerically in the ASE calculation. For this the ECHO FORC record
is used. For plastification number: see equation 2.45

Statistics of Non-linear Effects

The available non-linear effects are logged at the end of a non-linear calculation in ASE in
’STATISTIC NONLINEAR EFFEKTS’ For plastification number: see equation 2.45

2.12.8 Miscellaneous Information

Iteration Control - Improvement of the Convergence
Concrete Law

Usually a tolerance of 0.002 is sufficient for the concrete law (record SYST ...TOL). This tol-
erance is also needed for the energy convergence. With negative TOL -1.50 a fixed absolute
tolerance of 1.5 kN can be defined, if necessary not before 40% of the iterations: TOL4 -1.50

The convergence problems in non-linear calculations, which consider the concrete law, could
initially be solved by increasing the number of iterations (SYST...ITER). If after, for example,
50 iteration the energy still increases, the load can not be taken up anymore, this is because:
– a lack of reinforcement (tensile forces can not be compensated anymore)

– the plate is to thin (compression failure)

– the elements next to the singularity are to small (shear problem)

All these three problems lead to a point where the load can not be compensated anymore, due

2-52 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

to an increase in strain. So the product of load·strain = energy will increase constantly.

This can only be resolved by altering the system:

– increase reinforcement

– adjust the dimensions

– decrease the load (try a lower load step)

If the program does not reach a residual force equilibrium, even if the energy converges (the
energy seems to remain close to the limiting value), then generally it could be attributed
to the following reason: The program does not reach equilibrium in the normal direction
of the plate - small changes in the strain plane generate large normal forces. Although
this phenomena is usually insignificant for plate calculations and only has a local influence
on the result. This becomes apparent when a check is performed on the residual forces
(WinGRAF...nodes...residual forces).

Often a damping of the iteration is successful with SYST...FMAX 0.90 (FMAX smaller than 1.0
or FMAX 1.10).

If no convergence is found, the intermediate results of the iterations are saved with the load
case numbers from 90001. They can be checked in the ANIMATOR with displacements and in
WinGRAF with residual forces in order to find out the cause of the lacked convergence. With
ECHO RESI 7 this can be enforced also for a convergent run.

Often the convergence can be improved by the lowering of the concrete tension stiffness e.g.
to 0.5 N/mm2 . This is because the negative stiffness, on the decreasing curve of the concrete
stress-strain curve, is not that big and it can be equilibrated by the positive stiffness of the
reinforcement including the tension stiffening. On the other hand it is possible that a bigger
concrete tension stiffness could instantaneously release a large amount of concrete failure en-
ergy. This energy would then spread like a chain reaction through the system and convergence
would be prevented. An increase in the minimum reinforcement would also improve the con-
vergence, because the reinforcement would counteract the negative stiffness of the decreasing
stress-strain curve.

Steel Law

Steel plates or shells do not encounter instantaneous tension failure, as is the case for the
concrete law. Besides being able to increase the number of iterations (SYST...ITER), one also
has the possibility to generate a trilinear instead of a bilinear stress-strain curve, which has its
advantages. The tangential stiffness in a bilinear curve is equal to zero, i.e. a strain correction
of the program would not alter the stress. Another advantage is the slowly increasing curve,
which is favourable for the Newton-Raphson-method.

In addition the steel law allows a step-wise increase of the load, as described in chapter "bear-
ing load iteration".

Tangential Stiffness
For non-linear material calculations one always works with linear initial stiffness and compen-
sation of the unabsorbed residual forces. An experimental material stiffness was implemented
for improving the convergence of the iterations, but it did not achieve the desired effect and

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-53

ASE | Theoretical Principles

was thus deactivated.

Non-linear material calculations, according to the first-order theory, utilize the Crisfield standard
(CTRL ITER 0) in the iteration control. The line-search with the geometric-tangential stiffness
matrix is only utilized in case of second-order theory are crack springs (CTRL ITER 3). The
material matrix is always substituted with the linear initial stiffness and is not tangentially up-
dated.

You can always try both variants CTRL ITER 0 or CTRL ITER 3 but please start with the default
(no input to CTRL ITER).

Bearing Load Iteration

In a lot of cases it is of interest to establish the maximum bearing load of a given system.
To do this the bearing load iteration is applied. Here the load is increased step-wise until the
point of failure is reached. The point of failure is interpreted as a lack in energy convergence,
i.e. the system starts to fail if the energy is steadily increased during a bearing load itera-
tion. A simple bearing load iteration can be found in example ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat ,
for cracked concrete also in the verification examples nonlinear_quad_concrete_beam.dat (
nonlinear_quad_concrete_beam.pdf)

For non-linear material calculations it often happens that this automatic method does not reach
adequate equilibrium, due to a lack in normal force convergence, even if the bearing load has
not been reached yet. This can be overcome by entering a negative input for STEP under the
record ULTI. Now the load is continuously increased, even if no convergence is reached after
every individual load step. The user has to be assessed then the systems bearing capacity
according to the energy convergence, the remaining residual forces and the load deflection
curve. Alternatively the procedure could gain stability through the dynamic calculation.

2.13 Membrane Structures: Formfinding and Static Analysis

See also YOUTUBE Video https://youtu.be/EvJuyYhPQKk
and https://youtu.be/AJpfZ995lcs

2.13.1 Overview
Membrane structures are characterized by transferring of loads only with normal forces. Bend-
ing moments and shear forces are not available. The analysis with real membrane elements
is more comfortable and more exactly unlike the simplified processing with a truss model, be-
cause the geometry and the stress state can be generated any exactly.

Membranes should be generated with triangulas elements (SOFIPLUS export triangles).

The first task is the formfinding during the analysis of membrane structures. A corresponding
form is searched for a desired stress state in the membrane. A soap skin is only result here
for the isotropic prestress. Forms which are different to the soap skin need a normal force
distribution which modifies itself about the structure.

For formfinding we do not use masses and no time step analysis, that means no transient anal-
sis and no dynamic relaxation. You can better use the word ’force density’ but force density
only works on the geometry alone. We (SOFiSTiK) use for formfinding the normal geometric
nonlinear FE analysis with residual force iteration but with nearly zero stiffness in the mem-
brane. That keeps the given stress in the membrane constant (soap film). As the stiffness is

2-54 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

zero in membrane direction we use additional mesh control techniques to avoid a swimming of
the nodes on the soap film.

If the membrane form is found, real load cases can be calculated with this new form as initial
system. The membrane must be omitted here for compression. Further textile properties are
realized mostly by a simplified linear- elastic orthotropic material law. So when the membrane
has its normal stiffness e.g. in a final wind analysis, SOFiSTiK makes a normal geometric
nonlinear FE analysis (Newton Raphson and Crisfield or line search residual force iteration).

Edge stiffenings with edge cables, inside cables or compression arches can be considered in
real structures.

2.13.2 The Membrane Element

The membrane element implemented in ASE can be used only for calculations with large
deformations with SYST ... PROB TH3. It is activated with the material input AQUA NMAT
MEMB or with an input in SOFiMSHA...QUAD...NRA=2 (QUAD only with membrane action).
The program configuration levels ASE1-3 are necessary for the material non-linear element
and ASE4 for compression failure.

Membranes should be generated with triangular elements (SOFIPLUS export triangles). The
reason is that quads may get angles > 180 degree in the formfinding (problematic) and that
cannot happen on triangles. And as the nonconforming shape functions are switched off for
membranes, the triangles are as good as 4-noded quads.

Figure 2.43: Mesh with triangular elements = recommended

Properties
The membrane element described here is implemented in the FE program ASE of the
SOFiSTiK AG. It has following properties:

• The membrane element processes only membrane internal forces and moments (NX, NY,
NXY).
• It bears arbitrary large strains and rotations.
• It bears large twists and transmits the membrane forces from the twist into the right direction
(here forces are available perpendicular to the thought element centre area).
• It is possible to use three-noded or four-noded elements for it.
• A prestress can be defined (also orthotropic).

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-55

ASE | Theoretical Principles

• Stress modifications can be suppressed for the formfinding.

• It failures for compression (adjustable).
• Orthotropic material properties can be considered (linear-elastic approximation). For
anisotropic poisson’s ratio see example membrane_poisson_ratio.dat

Figure 2.44: Nodal forces at twisted 4-noded membrane element

The stiffness of the membrane element consists of the normal strain stiffness in the element
plane and of a initial stress stiffness from the prestress of the element.

K = K0 + Ks (2.47)

Input of the Membrane element

Membrane elements are input like normal shell elements as element type QUAD. If the ele-
ment formulation NRA=2 (see SOFiMSHA-QUAD) is set immediately, the element is marked
as membrane. Otherwise a normal QUAD element can be defined as membrane with a non-
linear material input AQUA NMAT

Non-linear properties can be activated in AQUA with AQUA NMAT MEMB P1 P2.

P1 Yield strength for tension

maximum tensile strength in kN/m in warp and fill direction,
practical e.g. for geo-textiles
The input P1=0.0 is taken as ’no input’.
The old input P1=1.0 is not considered
(P1 was used formerly with another meaning.)
P2 Factor for compression survey
P2=1.0 The membrane can sustain the compression.
P2=0.0 The membrane cannot sustain the compression.
(only reasonable after formfinding)
P2=0.1 Intermediate values are possible, the elastic
modulus is reduced correspondingly for the
compression strains.

In standard cases e.g. for material 5 the input NMAT 5 MEMB

is sufficient to define the most important effect of membranes: no conpression - only tension
(in a mterial nonlinear analysis with ASE SYST NMAT yes).

2-56 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Nonlinear warp-fill material law

In ASE a "‘Nonlinear yarn-parallel warp-fill behaviour"’ is implement according to: Dr. Cédric
Galliot + Dr. Rolf Luchsinger ’A simple non-linear material model for PVC-coated polyester
fabrics’ Tensinews Newsletter Nr. 18 April 2010

The definition of additional parameters AQUA NMAT MEMB P3+P4 activates this law. The
nonlinear behavior is expressed as a stress-strain relation. This means that for a given stress
sigma-w, sigma-f (w=warp direction, f=fill direction) it gives a corresponding nonlinear strain
eps-w, eps-f. The values of the stress-strain matrix depend on the ratio of sigma-w to sigma-f
using the factors γ und γƒ :
σ σƒ
γ = q γƒ = q (2.48)
σ 2 + σƒ 2 σ 2 + σƒ 2

Stress-strain relation:

    
1 −νƒ
ε   E (γ ) E (γ )   σ 
 = −νƒ
(2.49)
1
εƒ E (γ ) Eƒ (γƒ ) σƒ

with the stress-ratio depending warp and fill stiffness:

1
 
E (γ ) = ΔE γ − p + E1:1  (2.50)
2

1
 
Eƒ (γƒ ) = ΔEƒ γƒ − p + E1:1 ƒ (2.51)
2

Special Features for the System Input

The system should be already defined, if possible, three-dimensionally with boundary arches.
The boundary cables can be introduced then with full stiffness in the first formfinding step, be-
cause they have already the right length. The three-dimensional input has also the advantage,
that the span cables and columns can be already input in the three-dimensional system. Then
the still inaccurate form of the membrane is smoothed via ”shrinkage” of the membrane - see
formfinding.

Only for systems with high reference point it is reasonable to input the system at first two-
dimensionally, because the input is significantly simpler here. The membrane can be hoisted
then at marked points via nodal point displacements.

Mesh selection

Automatically generated meshes are unproblematic for systems without high reference points.
They should be avoided at high reference points. At high reference points a radially and tan-
gentially oriented mesh is numerically more stable and optically more beautiful due to the often
orthotropic prestress.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-57

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Mesh macros

Pregenerated macros can be used for high reference points. Macros which are read in such
a way are optimized for the registration of the stress conditions at the high reference points
and delivers a good geometry for high reference points (The distance of the inner elements is
selected deliberately near in the initial system, because they are stretched due to the hoisting
during formfinding).

The macros are placed in the plan, adjusted to the size (stretched) and the remaining mem-
brane area is closed with a normal element mesh.

Boundary cables

Boundary cables should be always defined with the desired final curvature at an arch during
input in the plan - see chapter ”Free Cable Edges defined in the Initial System with Radius”.

Mixed systems

If the membrane should be calculated together with other structural members (walls, pylons,
girders), the input is mostly urgently necessary with three-dimensional initial system.

Prestress and Formfinding

As in outline mentioned in chapter ”Overview”, the prestress is decisive for the formfinding.
Different membrane forms can be generated with different prestressing states.

This phenomenon becomes especially clear for boundary cables: If a boundary cable is more
prestressed for a given membrane prestress, a larger cable radius will result and thus a smaller
pass of the boundary cable:

Figure 2.45: A boundary cable left with small, right with large prestress

At high reference points a too large prestress ties up the ”neck”:

Figure 2.46: Left a too small, right a too large prestress

The user has to be known the desired form at the beginning. The pass of the boundary cable
should be used already during the system input. The input FE mesh should include therefore

2-58 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

the boundary cable curvature.

Soap skin

In a soap skin an isotropic prestress is available in all points of the membrane. This prestress
is determined about the surface tension of the liquid for the genuine soap skin.

The strain stiffness disappears here in the mathematical model. The equilibrium results only
from the three-dimensional equilibrium of the isotropic stresses. The stiffness of the membrane
results to:

K = Kσ (2.52)

The stiffness keeps the membrane in its form perpendicularly to the membrane area. Thought
points are freely movable in the plane of the membrane area. For the genuine soap skin the
phenomenon is visible at the blurring of the points (bubbles) on the skin surface.

The in all directions constant prestress is input in ASE with the record GRP ... PREX,PREY
(acts on all element types, also on cables, beams ...).

Constant orthotropic prestress

The direction of effective span is often dominating in one direction for rectangular membrane
areas. Then it is desired to set a larger prestress in this direction than perpendicularly to it.
Nevertheless the prestress is of the same size in all points, if also orthotropically.

Figure 2.47: Orthotropic prestress - in longitudinal direction larger than in transverse direction

The orthotropic constant prestress is input in ASE either with the record GRP ... PREX,PREY
in local element direction or with the record HIGH with a high reference point distance > 999
m in global direction.

Orthotropic high reference point prestress

If genuine high reference points are available for membranes, the orthotropic prestress is often
desired with a fixed ratio of tangential/radial prestress in order to avoid a large tying up of the
membrane at the high reference point. A radial stress which increases to the high reference
point is necessary for that.

A such axisymmetric stress state of the high reference point is generated with HIGH. The ratio

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-59

ASE | Theoretical Principles

of the tangential to the radial prestress is input with the item PTPR. In dependence on PTPR
the stress increases much or not so much to the high reference point.

Example of a high refence point at X = 5.0 m, Y = 0.0 m:

HIGH X 5.0 Y 0.0 PR1 20 PTPR 0.4 produces:

sig-r in distance of 1m = 20.00 kN/m
sig-t in distance of 1m = 8.00 kN/m (0.4*20)
and due to equilibrium reasons in distance of e.g. 10 m:
sig-r in distance of 10m = PR1*1/r*eˆ(PTPR*ln(r))
= 20*1/10*exp(0.4*ln(10))
= 5.02 kN/m
sig-t in distance of 10m = 2.01 kN/m (0.4*5.02)
see example file: high_point.dat
input: HIGH XM YM ZM NX NY NZ PR1 PTPR NOG

As a default an input for a high reference point has an effect for all QUAD elements, also for
elements which are not a membrane. For mixed systems the prestress is allocated therefore
with NOG to the corresponding group. It is also possible to input some high reference points
per group. The program generates then the average value from the inputs in each element in
dependence on the distance to the different high reference points. In the following example
there are four high points and one low point in a membrane area. The tangential part PTPR
may not be too large for the high reference points, because the membrane constricts itself and
tears off. The factor PTPR is input therefore different for the five high reference points in this
example.

Figure 2.48: Orthotropic high reference point prestress with some high reference points ( mem-
bran5.dat)

If the distance is larger than 1000 m, the constant prestress is assumed with a stress in di-
rection to the high reference point always of PR1 and a stress perpendicularly to it always of
PTPR·PR1 and therefore without radial reduction. The advantage of this input is the simple
definition of skewed prestress independently on the direction of the local element coordinate
systems! The stress in the QUAD elements results from the global directions!

Elastic skin

2-60 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

A membrane can be defined from the beginning with the real stiffness and can be hoisted from
the plane initial system at the high reference points or at the boundary cables. It results then
large stresses in direction to the high reference points in dependence on the material proper-
ties. They can be scaled, however, by using this state with the group factors FACL+FACS. The
use of a elastic skin formfinding is described in chapter ”Unstable Membrane Forms”.

Input of the Prestress for Different Groups

Definition in different groups

For membrane analyses the system has to be got already in the first step an information about
a prestress in the elements, because otherwise the system is unstable - the stiffness is zero
perpendicularly to the membrane without prestress! A load prestress is still not considered for
the system stiffness. The prestress has to be input therefore with GRP or HIGH.

The different elements of the structure like:

• membrane areas
• boundary cables
• structural cables
• pylones and other beams
• massive support elements (concrete walls ...)

are defined in different groups and can get thus different prestresses from GRP and HIGH.

If different radii in boundary cables should be kept exactly (formfinding also for boundary ca-
bles), then also the boundary cables should be defined in different groups. If the boundary
radii were already input graphically (is absolutely recommended), it is possible to refrain the
exact input of the boundary cable prestress, because the boundary cable force results from the
radius and the membrane prestress during the formfinding.

Criteria for the Input of the Prestress

Free cable edges (free membrane edges reinforced with cables) should be input already as
arch with the desired curvature radius in the initial system. The radius is preset in any case by
the architect. If the boundary cable is defined as line in the initial system and the final edge
circle should be determined by the program, then impermissible element angles are often
available due to the distorsions. The iterations are much faster and clearer, if the edge arch
has approximately the final position already in the initial system.

The prestress which should be input for the boundary cable results to:

cable force = membrane force radius P = n · r

It is to be noted, that physical impermissible inputs do not arise. Unconsistent inputs can
arise especially at the connection points of cables. In the following example an equilibrium is
possible without an angle of the cable forces, because P1 > P2+P3+P4.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-61

ASE | Theoretical Principles

cable 2

cable 1 cable 3

Figure 2.49: Illogical preset cable prestress can not be right

2.13.3 Formfinding
System Definition - Two Options
The initial structure can be defined with two options for the formfinding:

• Definition of a three-dimensional initial system with at first plane partial areas: The bound-
ary points of the structure are input three-dimensionally. The remaining areas are defined
e.g. as folded structure. The program takes over the formfinding of the inner area.
• Definition of a plane initial system: The structure is input two-dimensionally. At arbitrary
points the structure is ”hoisted” then at support nodes.

Three-dimensional Initial System

Three-dimensional initial system without cable edges

Example angle, example file simple_angle.dat.

A system is defined three-dimensionally from two planes (folded structure). All boundary points
are supported, the lower edge is free.

Figure 2.50: Three-dimensional initial system - angle

The membrane prestress is defined isotropic with GRP ... SIGX SIGY in kN/m during the
formfinding step. Because the strains should not lead to stress modifications due to the
formfinding, the element stiffness is set almost to 0: GRP FACS=1E-10. The QUAD elements
with the material number 1 are defined as membrane elements ( AQUA NMAT 1 MEMB). ASE

2-62 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

input:

PROG ASE
HEAD Formfinding for 3D Initial Systems
SYST PROB TH3 ! for geomatrical non-linear iterations
GRP 0 FACS 1E-10 PREX 10 PREY 10 ! prestress definition 10 kN/m
LC 1 TITL Formfinding ! form-finding without further load
END

A load case with real 1.0-times stiffness should be follow after each formfinding load case
for the check of the formfinding in order to guarantee that possible constraints do not lead
to impermissible differences during formfinding. Furthermore an air loading from SOFILOAD
must be updated, see example tennis.dat and air_volume_tennis.dat

PROG ASE
HEAD Compensation of Possible Residual Forces
SYST PROB TH3 PLC 1 ! uses the primary load case 1
GRP 0 FACS 1 ! elemets with full stiffness, stresses
LC 2 ! are used from load case 1 (see record GRP)
END

The iterations are necessary due to the effects from third-order theory. The vertical force parts
(sinus(α ) ̸= α ) change due to the large displacements. In addition the element geometries
change also in part considerably. The first ASE calculations ends successfully after 9 itera-
tions:

Iteration 1 Residual 1.889 energy 22.6089 Step 1-1 f= 1.000

Update nonlinear stiffness
Iteration 2 Residual 0.239 energy 30.7733 Step 2-1 f= 1.487
Iteration 3 Residual 0.222 energy 32.4090 Step 3-1 f= 1.814
Update nonlinear stiffness
Iteration 4 Residual 0.134 energy 32.7557 Step 4-1 f= 1.838
Iteration 5 Residual 0.017 energy 32.6185 Step 4-2 f= 0.604
Iteration 6 Residual 0.008 energy 32.6450 Step 5-1 f= 0.607
Update nonlinear stiffness
Iteration 7 Residual 0.003 energy 32.6701 Step 6-1 f= 1.178

The convergence has to be checked by the user. Indeed the programs prints a warning in the
case of inadequate convergence, but it saves the results nevertheless.

The result of the formfinding of load case 1 is shown in the following picture. The load case 2
does not deliver any modifications. The check of the formfinding does not show disturbances.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-63

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Figure 2.51: Result of the formfinding -three-dimensional initial system angle

For orthotropic prestress other forms which are all free form areas result in dependence on the
prestress condition:

Figure 2.52: V-long/V-lat=1:5 V-long/V-lat=1:2 orthotropic prestress -three-dimensional initial sys-

tem angle-

Corresponding input files:

PROG ASE
HEAD Angle with Orthotropic Prestress
SYST PROB TH3
GRP 0 FACS 1E-10
HIGH 9999 0 PR1 10 PTPR 0.2
! PR1 = prestress radial in a distance of 1m from high reference point
! PTPR = prestress ration tangential/radial
LC 1 TITL Form-finding
END

Free Cable Edges defined in the Initial System with Radius

Example stand roofing, example file roof.dat

If possible, a cable radius should be considered already during the graphical input. That means
the cable should be input in an arch (see chapter ”Boundary cables”).

Following system was generated three-dimensionally as folded structure with plane partial
meshes during a graphical input. The cable edges are displaced only horizontally in the plane

2-64 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

at a circle:

Figure 2.53: Stand roofing - initial system plane left and angular picture right

Group classification:

group 1: membrane expected membrane force X-Y=10-5 kN/m

group 2: edge cable left expected radius = 16 m
group 3: edge cable right expected radius = 46 m

Here the cable radius is preset instead of the cable force. The membrane prestress should
have 10 kN/m in x direction, however, only 5 kN/m in y direction! Thus a first estimated cable
force of P = n · r with a membrane force n=10 kN/m perpendicular to the cable results (group
2: N = 16m· 10 kN/m = 160 kN).

Because the cable radius is not to be modified significantly, the cable elements are considered
with their normal stiffness (GRP ... FACS 1.0) during the calculation. A cable force modification
is possible thereby. Here it is important, that the radius of the input is kept approximately in the
final result (specification of the architect).

Otherwise the membrane should be kept the stress. The membrane stiffness is set therefore
as usual with GRP ... FACS 1E-10:

PROG ASE
HEAD Formfinding
CTRL CABL 0 $ without inner cable sag of the single cable $
SYST PROB TH3
GRP 1 FACS 1E-10 PREX 10 PREY 5 $ membrane 10 KN/m - 5 KN/m2 $
GRP 2 FACS 1 PREX 160 $ cable N= p*r = 10*16 = 160KN $
GRP 3 FACS 1 PREX 460 $ cable N= p*r = 10*46 = 460KN $
LC 1 FACD 1 TITL 'Formfinding with DL'
END

The dead load is used simultaneously. The form is searched therefore for the loading prestress
+ dead load. Only the elimination of possible constraint forces is done again in a following
calculation in load case 2:

PROG ASE
HEAD Compensation of Possible Residual Forces with FACS=1.0
SYST PROB TH3 PLC 1 ! uses primary load case 1

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-65

ASE | Theoretical Principles

GRP - FACS 1 ! elements now with full stiffness, stresses

LC 2 FACD 1 TITL 'end of formfinding FACS=1.0'
END

Because the displacement picture is not different for load case1 and 2, only the final result of
load case 2 is shown here:

Figure 2.54: Found form with prestress + dead load

Free cable edges defined straightly in initial system

Example angle, example file simple_angle2.dat.

Such a process should be avoided, because the QUAD elements are deformed possibly im-
permissible during the deformation of the boundary cable. This distortion and rotation of the
QUAD elements is very unfavourable for orthotropic prestress, because the local coordinate
system of the elements and the direction of the orthotropic prestress are turned.

Following example should demonstrate nevertheless the possibility of the formfinding for cable
edges which are input straightly. The first example simple_angle.dat is so modified, that a
upper boundary is defined as free edge (without support conditions) and a boundary cable is
generated at the boundary nodes. The membrane is defined in group 0 and the cable in group
1.

The iteration is very fast for the system and the result is reasonable, because boundary cable
curvature does not distort the QUAD elements. The cable radius is resulted always according
to following formula:

cable force = membrane force · radius P = n · r

or r = P / n = 8 kN / 2 kN/m = 4 m

2-66 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.55: Free cable edge - result of the formfinding

Plane Initial System

Plane initial system without high reference point

Example file innenhof.dat

Without additional elements like columns it is possible to define systems in plane and to hoist
at corners. Only corner nodes in the plane, boundary cables with desired edge radii as well
as meshes which are hooked in are generated here. The system is simple hoisted then at the
corner nodes about the support displacements. The membrane becomes mostly a soap skin
prestress which is input with GRP ... PREX,PREY. The boundary cables have mostly a fixed
radius. The first estimation of the prestress of the boundary edges results from the membrane
force multiplied by this radius.

Figure 2.56: Patio - left plane initial system - right result of the formfinding

Plane initial system with high reference point

The plane system input is very advantageous for systems with high reference points. The high
reference points are hoisted using the support displacements and remain in this position for
further calculations. Following input generates the formfinding for a small tangential prestress
(HIGH - ratio tangential/radial prestress = PTPR=0.1):
example file high_point.dat

PROG ASE
HEAD Input of highe reference point
SYST PROB TH3
GRP 0 FACS 1E-10 $ membrane $
HIGH 0 0 PR1 10 PTPR 0.1
LC 1 FACD 1 TITL Formfinding
LCC ... copy nodal displacement from SOFILOAD - see input file ase.dat..

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-67

ASE | Theoretical Principles

membranes \sofExampleFile{ase}[english/membranes]{high\_point.dat}[]
END
HEAD Compensation with FACS=1.0
SYST PROB TH3 PLF 1
GRP - FACS 1.0 $ membrane $
LC 2 FACD 1 TITL 'Compensation with FACS=1.0'
END

Figure 2.57: Angular picture: plane initial system - result of the formfinding principle membrane
force

The formfinding which begins with a plane initial mesh is to be seen also very well for another
example with four high points and one low point. The system is here also generated very fast
in the plane by copying the high reference point macro (example file membran5.dat).

Mesh Control
It exists the danger in the formfinding step, that the nodal points become blurred in the mem-
brane plane. In order to avoid that, a so-called mesh control relaxes (optimizes) the mesh of
the inner membrane nodse - see CTRL ... FIXZ.

Saving of the Found Form

If the formfinding is completed, it is basically possible to put always on the found form with
SYST PLC for further calculations. A result representation with WinGRAF is actually always
desired at the formfinding system. In addition it is desired, that the ANIMATOR lets swing
e.g. the deformations from wind in relation to the formfinding system. Without further control,
however, the ANIMATOR would swing between the input system and the system deformed by
the wind. In addition a new selection of the local coordinate system of the membrane elements
is sometimes reasonable, if e.g. a fibre direction of the cloth should be defined from the high
reference point.

A function SYST ... STOR is therefore available in ASE. With this function the coordinates and
the local coordinate systems of the elements can be generated newly by using the deformations
of a load case PLC. Displacements of the load cases which put on that are only output as

2-68 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

difference displacements to this updated system.

Following literals are indicated in this case for STOR:

STOR YES
The position of the new local coordinate system of the QUAD elements results from
the strains of the primary load case PLC.
STOR NEW, XX, YY, ZZ, NEGX, NEGY, NEGZ
The local coordinate systems are calculated newly from the new coordinates.
· see manual SOFiMSHA record QUAD - KR

Example simple_angle.dat
The local coordinate systems and the stresses of the load case 2 are printed as follows in the
initial system:

Figure 2.58: Coordinate system and representation of the internal forces and moments at the initial
system

After the update of the geometry with:

PROG ASE
HEAD
SYST PLC 2 STOR YES
END

the same representation is printed considerably more beautifully. The undeformed (!) structure
of the updated system is represented now:

Figure 2.59: Representation of the coordinate system and the internal forces and moments at the
updated system

With STOR YES the internal forces and moments of the primary load case can be used and
represented furthermore, because the internal forces and moments refer to the new coordinate

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-69

ASE | Theoretical Principles

system.

With STOR NEW,XX ... NEGZ the internal forces and moments do not match the new coordi-
nate system and they are deleted during an ASE calculation with SYST ... STOR NEW...NEGZ.

The displacements of the primary load case are deleted in any case, because they are included
now in the geometry - in the new coordinates.

The current database can be saved with SYST ... STOR before an update, e.g. with
+sys copy $(project).cdb sichxyz.cdb.

Formfinding with Loading

The dead load of the construction was input during formfinding already in the example of the
stand roofing. The found form lies then a little deeper as the pure membrane form without dead
load. The effect does not strike for a small dead load. Also the boundary cable is very light.

It is also possible to search deliberately a form with consideration of an outside loading, e.g.
with constant internal pressure (air pressure).

An internal pressure of 2 kN/m2 is used during the formfinding in the example sim-
ple_angle.dat. The membrane prestress is selected with 2 kN/m2 . The air pressure ist best
applied via VOLU as this load updates the load direction during the iteration see example
air_volume_tennis.dat and air_volume_sphere.dat

The membrane eigenstiffness is switched off again in the formfinding load case 11 in order to
prevent stress modifications in the membrane force due to strains. The load case 11 shows
following deformation picture:

Figure 2.60: Example angle with internal pressure

2-70 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.61: load case 11 load case 12 Angle with internal pressure

The lower picture shows the formfinding of a compressed air tennis hall beginning with a plane
mesh. The calculation as ideal soap skin results here in a curios corner generation. Real
tennis halls leave mostly the ideal soap skin form for the benefit of a better space utilization in
the corner with the disadvantage of an orthotrop stress distribution with disturbance areas in
the corner.

Figure 2.62: Tennis hall: pumping up of a soap skin with plane initial system - tennis.dat

A further example for formfinding with internal pressure is to be found in six_corners.dat:

Figure 2.63: Hexagon: pumping up of a spherical shell six_corners.dat and

air_volume_sphere.dat

Load Direction and Load Area

Without VOLU and using an inner air pressure from SOFILOAD, an update of the loading
with a following formfinding step with the same load is urgently necessary, because then the
conversion of the load into nodal loads can be done only on basis of the element geometry
of the primary load case. On the one hand load direction changes and on the other hand the

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-71

ASE | Theoretical Principles

element areas (air pressure area) changes see example air_volume_tennis.dat

For all element loading from SOFILOAD it is generally valid: The load is converted into nodal
loads at the system of the primary load case. Deformations of the current calculated load case
do not twist the load anymore. It has to be calculated therefore always with small load steps
and with a new setting up onto a primary load case also for a girder which is designed for
buckling, if e.g. the load should be twisted to the local z axis of the beam in conformity with the
beam rotations!

Formfinding for Compression Arch Shells

The form which is found with the soap skin and e.g. using negative dead load can be used also
as initial system for a compression shell. In this case the element thicknesses and the material
parameters can be redefined after formfinding and the membrane elements can be converted
into normal shell elements which can carry then the positive dead load and the real loads with
compressive forces, bending moments and shear forces. In SOFiMSHA the definition NRA=2
may not be input. The switching over from the membrane to the concrete is done with a first
AQUA calculation withAQUA MAT + NMAT MEMB for the formfinding. Then the material CONC
is redefined with a following AQUA calculation.

2.13.4 Static Analysis

In general the formfinding is only a first step during the calculation of membrane structures.
The loading wind and snow which is essentially for the design of the building structure must be
carried by the system which is determined during formfinding. The snow load can be defined
mostly very simple. The wind load, however, depends on the height, position and direction of
the single element.

Generation of the Wind Load

If the possibilities for the input of the wind load are not sufficient in SOFiMSHA, the wind load
can be defined also as block load: example membrane_compression.dat . With a little more
expenditure the wind load can be input also as a function of the height in dependence on the
position with angle functions.

The output of all elements including the definition of the element centre of gravity as well as the
printout of the local z axis (normal) can be done in ASE with ECHO ELEM 4. If the list is read
into a table calculation program, it can be fast converted into a load input by using of formulas.
Then each element get its own local loading. A system has not to be calculated using ECHO
ELEM 4 in an ASE calculation - CTRL SOLV 0 can be input here. The output values refer to
the system which was displaced possibly with the primary load case SYST ... PLC. Following
input generates the subsequent output:

PROG ASE
HEAD Element centre of gravitiy and normal vector for wind loading
ECHO FULL NO
ECHO ELEM 4
CTRL SOLV 0
SYST PLC 12
LC 13 DLZ 1
END

S H E L L E L E M E N T S

2-72 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

EL-No XM(m) YM(m) ZM(m) nx ny nz

1 -22.267 6.178 -.398 .342 .082 .936
2 -21.832 8.165 -.326 .222 -.264 .939
3 -20.999 3.618 -.633 .381 .105 .919
4 -19.828 1.022 -.817 .412 .123 .903
5 -20.687 8.110 -.628 .251 -.283 .926
6 -20.635 5.709 -.978 .364 .069 .929
7 -20.237 7.585 -.902 .249 -.264 .932
element centre of gravity normal vector

Wind pressure till compression failure

The tensile stresses due to the prestress can not be sufficient for large wind forces in the
reality. Further compressive strains lead to folds in the membrane. They have, however, no
influence on the structural behaviour for these special cases. The system is mostly stable also
with folds. The program ASE can realized the load transfer which exists here with switching off
of the compressive stresses.

A wind pressure from below which uses the prestress in transverse direction up is used in the
example stand roofing ( roof.dat). It would produce therefore folds in reality. At first the system
is updated in the calculation by setting up onto formfinding load case 2:

PROG ASE
HEAD System update for calculation of new displacements
HEAD from formfinding state LC 2
SYST PLC 2 STOR YES
END

Figure 2.64: Updated system - coordinate systems

Figure 2.65: Side view

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-73

ASE | Theoretical Principles

All elements with the stiffness factor 1.0 have to be input now for the following wind loading,
because strains should generate now stress modifications in the system.

In the following picture the stress in the centre are actually only uniaxial for full wind. The stress
is omitted biaxially even in four elements:

Figure 2.66: Membrane forces wind from below - - rigth: in initial system

Textile Material Laws

Essential membrane properties can be described with an orthotrop but otherwise linear-elastic
material according to an article in Bauingenieur 70, 1995 on page 271 by R. Münsch and H. W.
Reinhardt. Such a material can be defined at SOFiSTiK with the record AQUA MAT . It means
here:

AQUA MAT E elastic modulus in x direction

EY elastic modulus in y direction
MUE Poisson’s ratio related to E
G shear modulus

The material law reads then:

     
σ E μ·E 0 ϵ
  1    
= · · (2.53)
σ μ · E Ey 0 ϵ
 
 y  1 − μ2   y 
τy 0 0 G · (1 − μ2 ) γy

A textile material can be input therefore with different elastic modules in warp and fill direction.
Only a Poisson’s ratio which relates to E is possible due to the necessary symmetry condition
in the material law see membrane_poisson_ratio.dat

The warp direction of the elements should lie in the local x direction of the elements. This
direction has to be defined during the (graphical) input of the elements. In special cases it is
also possible to input the angle in the material law with the angle of anisotropy OAL.

The failure of the membrane elements for compression is activated with ASE input SYST ...
NMAT YES.

Withj AQUA NMAT ... MEMB P3 P4 a nonlinear material law can be selected - see
nonlinear_warp_fill_behaviour.dat

2-74 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Examples for material input see atrium.dat

Relaxation and Cutting Pattern

The membrane can be cut, detensioned and developed in the plane after formfinding with the
program TEXTILE. Further information see manual for TEXTILE.

2.13.5 Unstable Membrane Forms

The tangential prestress can not be chosen in an any large way already in the simple example
membhoch.dat. If the tangential prestress is input in record HIGH about the factor 0.3, ASE
prints a divergence. An ANIMATOR picture of the load case which is nevertheless saved shows
following picture:

Figure 2.67: Initial system tent roof - generated in plane - bottle_nec.dat

Corresponding input - bottle_nec.dat:

PROG ASE
HEAD Bottleneck
HEAD ASE prints divergence - nevertheless look at load case 1 with ANIMATOR
SYST PROB TH3
GRP 0 FACS 1E-10
HIGH 0 0 PR1 1 PTPR 0.50
LC 1 DLZ 1 TITL ' Bottleneck'
LCC ... loads see .dat inputfile
END

Obviously the large tangential stress cords up the bottleneck (PTPR=0.50) so strong, that the
membrane or soap skin collapses.

The phenomenon keeps on being examined at following example. A membrane structure is

generated again in the plane. The high reference points are not discretized here - a upper
rigid ring which can be displaced constantly upwards about a support spring is accepted. An
isotropic prestress = formfinding of a soap skin is defined.
Example tent roof, example file tent.dat .

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-75

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Figure 2.68: Initial system tent roof - generated in the plane

The formfinding with 4 m ring lifting has a still stable form:

Figure 2.69: Initial system three-dim. representation Membrane hoisted 4 m

Due to a further lifting the neck cords up always more during the xyz compensation calculation.
By looking at the picture for 4 m lifting the closing forces of the defined membrane prestress
in ring direction can be already seen at the bottleneck. The calculation for 7 m lifting is only
convergent, if the elements get a residual stiffness with FACS 0.005. The following pictures
do not show any correct membrane stress state, but they point out at an unstable formfinding
process:

Figure 2.70: Membran 7 m hochgezogen Weiteriteriert 7 m

This effect can be shown at a soap skin which should be hoisted with a small ring. After a
critical height the soap skin constricts itself and is detached suddenly.

Following process is trusted by the human eye: The stress modification due to strains are not
suppressed anymore but they are allowed. The stress in the ring area increases due to the
lifting of the inner rings. The usual picture of a deformed soap skin (or of tights which are
tensed over the initial mesh) results thereby.

2-76 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.71: Elastic mesh 1 m till 6 m hoisted

2.13.6 Calculations of Cable Meshes

With the same methods formfindings can be done also for cable meshes. Discrete cable el-
ements are defined here instead of the membrane. As for the membrane the cable elements
can be used either as elements with constant prestress and known length or as elements with
full strain stiffness and planned initial length. Latter one is mostly desired for the simpler fill-
ing measuring of single cables with the same length. But it leads to distortions in the grid in
the plane projection of the displaced mesh. The lower picture shows the concept design of a
footbridge which is supported on a cable mesh - it is a research paper for the bridging of the
railway station place in Braunschweig.

At first the system is patitioned in an element grid in the plane with cables of the same length.
The boundary arches are connected at first at an approximate form. In the following formfinding
steps in which the corner points of the mesh are compulsory displaced into the desired vertical
position the boundary cables were defined at first as very elastic. That means they might
change their length arbitrarily, while the inner cables were defined with normal strain stiffness,
because they should not change their position. The four cables which are generated around
the inner deep points as well as single cables in the nearness are an exception. They have
to be defined also partially elastically in order to get a sufficient lowering of the deep points
and thus a double curvature of the cable mesh. These during formfinding more elastic inner
cables have to be produced and installed therefore with a larger length. Foremost the double
curvature of a membrane or of a mesh creates, however, the possibility to carry outer loads
without larger deformations. The stability becomes thereby clearly better also for the dynamic
vibration inclination.

The point-wise loading due to the footbridge which is not shown here leads to a further local
subsidence of the cable mesh. This is, however, favourably for the stability.

The compliance with a structure clearance for the lower street (shown in the side view) which

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-77

ASE | Theoretical Principles

is necessary also during load action was decisive for the concept design.

Figure 2.72: Cable mesh with the necessary structure clearance

2.13.7 Check List - Notes - Problem Solutions

System input:

• If possible, the system should be already defined three-dimensionally with boundary arches
(set local coordinate system for the arches). The boundary cables can be used then with
the full stiffness in the first formfinding step, because they have already the correct length.
The three-dimensional input has the advantage that the span cables and the columns can
be already defined in the three-dimensional system. Then the still inaccurate form should
be smoothed by ”shrinkage” of the membrane - see -> Formfinding.
• Without staying construction it is also possible to input the system in plane. Foremost then
the system is hoisted by using the support displacements. In this way corrections of the
height position are possible. The input of the boundary arches is indeed simpler. Because
the cable length of a boundary arch becomes clearly longer during lifting, the first step has
to be done with elastic cables (FACS 0.001).
• Definition of the boundary arches with the approximate curvature radius during input
• Usage of macros which are like a spider net for modelling of the high reference points
• Input of a central support node at the high reference points and connection of the surround-
ing membrane nodes at the structural points
• The first calculation with SOFiPLUS is also reasonable with a triangular mesh (mesh gen-
eration - triangles)

Formfinding:

• Estimation of the planned prestress of the elements (N=p·r) and definition about GRP and
HIGH

2-78 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

• Input of these elements which should keep their stress in the formfinding with GRP ... FACS
1E-10 - The strains does not generate then additional stresses.
• Calculation of the cables without inner cable sag (CTRL CABL 0)
• Termination of the formfinding always with a following load case with full stiffness GRP ...
FACS=1.0, setting up onto the last load case as primary load case

Setting up onto a primary load case:

• Input of it in SYST ... PLC

• A prestress may not be input at GRP ..., because it would be added to the primary stresses.
Exception: The primary stresses are not used with GRP ... FACL=0.
• GRP ... FACL=1 (default) adopts the primary stresses. So that they are in equilibrium
with the applied loads, the external loads like dead load, internal pressure or wind load
have to be used again and again. Exception: Constraint loads like support displacements,
temperature or prestress loads, because they are not external loads.

Static loading:

• For problems with the convergence the loading (wind) should be used with a small factor
and then further increase of the load after setting up onto this convergent state as primary
state.

Problems during iterations:

• A stable system is reported, then calculate only one iteration step with CTRL ... ITER 1 and
check the displacements with the ANIMATOR (first step force density method)
• Do not input the factor GRP ... FACS for the cables too small (better FACS=0.01) or calcu-
late it with CTRL ITER 3 V2 1
• If the cables are set with full stiffness in the first formfinding but the membrane elastically
, iteration problems may be available - then use the cable stiffness with FACS 0.01. It is
better set the boundary curvatures with preset cable prestresses.

For insistent problems, mail the input file to the SOFiSTiK support.

2.13.8 Overview about the Used Examples

-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-79

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Example Special feature

Introduction examples: - see ...\ase.dat\english\membranes
atrium.dat simple plane example with boundary cables
tennis.dat plane initial system - formfinding with internal pressure - air hall
simple_angle.dat formfinding three-dimensional initial system (angle), update with new
local coordinates, internal pressure
high_point.dat simple example with high point comparison of different PTPR ratios
roof.dat three-dimensional initial system (folded structure) boundary cables,
failure for large wind pressure from below
Further examples:
bottle_nec.dat same example as membhoch.dat with unstable bottleneck result
membrane_compression.dat
same example as membhoch.dat with compression failure for strong wind
membran5.dat plane initial system with 4 high points and a deep point
six_corners.dat plane initial system - formfinding with constant internal pressure
tent.dat plane initial system and two high points defined as rings, unstable
formfinding, soap skin, comparison with rubber
simple_angle2.dat formfinding with at first straight boundary cable, comparison four-node
and three-node elements
air_volume_tennis.dat Air hall with active aur volume VOLU

2.13.9 Literature on membranes and cutting pattern

Papers of SOFiSTiK on the Structural Membranes conference on textile composites and inflat-
able structures are:

Bellmann [19], Bellmann [20], Bellmann [21], Bellmann [22], Bellmann [23]

2.13.10 Necessary Program Versions

For the membrane analysis the extensions ASE1 and ASE3 are necessary additionally to the
ASE basic packet, for non-linear material analysis (compression failure) also ASE4.

2.14 Active Bending

2.14.1 Introduction
In earlier applications a straight beam was bent on SYST PROB TH3 into a curved shape see
Fig. 2.73 (group 1 in example active_bending_overview.dat).

As a result, we got a stressed bended beam. The curvature 1/r corresponds to the bending
moment M:

1 E∗
kpp = −>M= (2.54)
r r

The function in ASE ACTB uses another much easier way. The system is already input curved

2-80 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.73: Bending up a straight beam

and you only give the beam chain the information that it originally was straight, see Fig. 2.74.
In a first step ASE calculates the curvature of the curved input beam chain and then applies an
internal bending prestress that corresponds to this input curvature. This prestress would like
to bend back the beam chain into a straight shape.

The input shape must not be totally correct.The beam will push itself automatically into an
equilibrium active bending shape. In the following picture the beam behind is the just up-
bended beam (group 1), the middle beam (group 2) has already got the final input shape in
SOFIMSHA, the front beam (group 3) starts with a circular input geometry. In Fig. 2.75 left we
see the result without ACTB input, then group 2+3 are stress-free. The result with input ACTB
for groups 2+3 is shown on the right. Then all three beams end in the same stressed shape
and bending moment, see Fig. 2.76:

Figure 2.74: Prinziple of the ACTB technique: to gibe a curved beam the info: ’I was straight
originally’

1 1
2 2

3 3

Figure 2.75: Left system without ACTB, 3=circular input system, on the right result with ACTB

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-81

ASE | Theoretical Principles

-1.62
-1.5

-1.59
9

-1.59

-1.62

9
-1

-1.4

-1.4
.35

9
-1.62

-1.5
9

9
-1.5
.4
-1

-1.58
8
5
.3

-1.58
-1

-1.62

9
-1

-1.4

-1.4
.3

8
-1.62
5

-1.5
9

9
5

-1.5
.4 -1.3
-1

-1.58
8

8
-1.1
35

-1
.

-1.58
.4
-1

-1.62
9
-1.18

9
-1

-1.4

-1.4
.3

8
-1

-1.5
49 5

9
. 35
-1
. -1.3 -0.983
7
-1
.1 -0.979 5 -1.1 -0.983
7 .3
-1.1 -1
7 -1.17
-0.780 -0.782
5
-0.9
80 -0.780 -1.3 -0.979
7
-0.980 -1.1 -0.979
-0.580
-1.17
-0.780
-0.780
-0.780 -0.980
-0.383
-0.980
-0.5
80
-0.580 -0.780
-0.191
-0.780
-0.3
83
-0.384
-0.5 -0.1
80 91

-0.191 -0.3
84

-0.1
91

Figure 2.76: Bending moments are identical! -> ACTB works correct.

As a check we now remove the supports and let the beams relax freely (slow removal including
dynamic relexation). Then we get three straight beams again - as it must be, although two of
them were input with curved geometry! See Fig. 2.77.

Figure 2.77: Relaxation by smoothly removing the supports (only as a test)

2.14.2 Active Bending including a membrane

The new method ACTB now gives us the chance to easily insert a membrane. In the example
active_bending_membrane.dat we start only with a rough desired architectural form in the
graphical input SOFIPLUS and immediately insert a formfinding membrane. The curvatures
must not be exact in this input system. So the upper part with the membrane was input in a 45
degree plane to have an easy input, see Fig. 2.78.

2-82 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.78: input system SOFIPLUS: center: viev in x, right: side view (straight membrane input
plane)

With the special input ACTB, we specify now that the beam originated from a straight beam
and so the system nearly playfully iterates to its stability shape. Due to the bottom restraint, the
beams pull up and tension the anchorage cable. As the membrane is defined as a soap film
with given prestress, it finds a stress-constant form as well, see Fig. 2.79. The bottom cable of
the membrane can be input with a given length.

Figure 2.79: Result of formfinding with ACTB GRP 2 on beam chain (membrane+cable as usual)

Torsion: caused by the anchorage cable a slight torsion is induced compared to fig. 2.89.
Depending on the torsional restraint at the bottom the system is more or less flexible against
this horizontal loading of the anchorage cable.

To check if the active bending moment is correctly introduced in the curved input system, we
now let the beam relax. For this we switch off the membrane and the cable and cut the beam
into shorter pieces. With this we start a dynamic relaxation and as a result we really get straight
pieces, see Fig. 2.80.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-83

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Figure 2.80: dynamic relaxation (only as a test)

The system is rather flexible and would swing or flutter on wind. Without wind it is stable, but
the first buckling eigenfrequency is only a little bit greater than 1.0. Now it is easy to use the
system several times: Fig. 2.81.

Figure 2.81: Expo proposal

2.14.3 Active Bending throw tent and spere

Also in the example active_bending_throw_tent.dat we model the final form only roughly in the
graphical input. To reduce the height of the tent, the upper arch was compressed a little bit.
As a result, a kink was introduced in the beam. But this kink is not a problem and smoothened
(straightened) by the active bending technique, see Fig. 2.82.

Figure 2.82: Throw tent: left input system, right: stressed system after ACTB active bending
formfinding

With a four-node quad meshing, quads could be created at the kink with three nodes attached
to an active bending beam, one node before the kink, one at the kink and one behind.

2-84 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

If the active bending beam then gets nearly straight, at the kink an angle of nearly 180 degrees
would be created and cause an error.

Therefore, a triangle meshing is used here. As in membrane elements the nonconforming

shape functions of a four-node quad are switched off, the use of triangle elements is sufficient.

Torsion: the rotation of the main active bending plane causes a slight torsion. But as the rod
can nearly rotate free in the membrane pocket, the active bending beam withdraws himself as
good as possible from torsion. Only in case the friction in the membrane pocket is high e.g. for
a windsurf mast, a significant torsion may be induced on wind loading.

Example active_bending_sphere.dat demonstrates how to reach various final shapes with

different prestress input, see Fig. 2.83. Also in this example file the dynamic relaxation is
checked successful.

Figure 2.83: Sphere: left input system, middle: upper areas prestressed higher, right : vertical
areas stressed higher

Torsion: here no torsion appears in the building stage. The bending always acts in one plane.
Vertical to this plane no shear force appears (disregarding of little gravity loading in the upper
plane).

2.14.4 Torsion case study

If we bend a straight beam with a cable into an active bending shape and then apply a hori-
zontal force at the cantilever, we would first think a torsional moment at the bottom support is
gnerated, see Fig. 2.84

+
Figure 2.84: Torsion case study

In the following we demonstrate, that no torsional moment will appear in this case. Please

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-85

ASE | Theoretical Principles

notice that we can also start to bend the beam backward or under 30 degrees, see Fig. 2.85

Figure 2.85: left starting system, then bend to +x, under 30 degrees or backward (-y)

The amount of energy is the same for all three cases. Therefore a horizontal deformation of
the head should not activate additional energy in the system. But this would mean that the
system is unstable regarding rotation around the z axis. But the beam is fixed at the bottom -
so this should not be the case.

But it is - with a horizontal deformation the beam just rolls away without a force into the new
position, see Fig. 2.86 (at least theoretically). This happens for a perfect round beam, while
the cable must be attached at the cross section center of the beam. In reality a beam is never
perfect round - it will always bend into a favored direction.

Figure 2.86: Horizontal deformation of the cantilever - the beam just rolls away without force

We (the SOFiSTiK team) have build a real model and proved that the beam really rolls away
and no torsion appears, see YOUTUBE video with search term ’active bending torsion beam’.

You can also compare the behavior with a tube-cleaning-spiral that you twist at one end. Also
in case the spiral goes around in curves, you can twist it nearly without effort if the end of the
spiral and the spiral in between is not fixed against rotation.

2-86 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Conclusion: on many deformations and loadings an active bending beam just rolls away or
rotates and withdraws itself from torsion.

2.14.5 Torsion on beam with fixed ends

So we use a beam with restrained ends in example active_bending_torsion_mtfixed.dat ac-
cording Fig. 2.87 - then we can introduce a torsion. To test it, we first bend a straight beam
to a half circle (also requires bending moment at the end of the beam) and then apply torsion.
Accordingly, we rotate the left support left and the right support also left. As a result we get a
constant torsion in the beam.

MY MT

Figure 2.87: left: bend up a straight beam to a half circle and torsioned : center: MY right: MT

Under torsion, little horizontal deformations occur vertical to the circle plane. If we now freeze
the system and store it (ASE: SYST STIOR YES) and then start the active bending procedure
with ACTB GRP 1 MEND ’FIX’ MT ’FIX’ on the stress-free updated system, we get a torsion
in the beam - as in the original system. In the active bending routine this is created with a
rotational check that recognizes a torsion via the little horizontal deformations. You only have
to tell the program that the active bending beam is restrained at both ends and that at both
ends torsion can be applied (MEND ’FIX’ MT ’FIX’). Otherwise, ASE assumes that the beam
does not have bending or torsional moments at both ends - as in the first example.

2.14.6 No torsion in case of constant beam rotation

If we rotate both ends in opposite direction, so the left to the left and the right to the right,
we can rotate the beam without energy. The whole beam just rotates away, see Fig. 2.88.
This happens because the active bending beam originally came from a straight beam and the
stress-free length of the inner fiber has the same length as the outer fiber.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-87

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Figure 2.88: bend up a straight beam to a half circle and torsioned contraverse: no torsion MT
appears

This would not happen in case of a stress-free half circle - it has a shorter inner fibre and a
longer outer fibre. A torsion would require energy.

So again we see: it is not so easy to get torsion into an active bending beam.

2.14.7 Torsion caused by loading transverse to the main active bending plane
If we take the stressed system from the previous chapter and apply a horizontal force on top,
see fig. 2.89, the load and the induced shear force acts transverse to the main active bending
plane and we get a torsional moment MT. Depending on the torsional restraint at the bottom
the system is more or less flexible for this transverse loading.

Figure 2.89: MT for loading transverse to main plane: middle full, right torsionfree bottom fixing

If we take the so deformed system as a starting input system for an ACTB analysis, ASE can
extract a torsion-MT-prestress out of the rotation of the main curvature planes, see 2.90, refer
to input ACTB-MT.

2-88 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

Figure 2.90: MT for loading transverse to main plane: middle full, right torsionfree bottom fixing

But the material stress is small compared to the bending stress. In the example of fig. 2.78
max-tau-MT is less than 0.1% in relation to the maximum bending stress.

2.15 Dynamic Modal Analysis

For dynamic eigenvalues there are two main analysis methods available:

1. Direkt method according to Lanczos

2. Simultaneous inverse vector iteration

The method according to Lanczos is usually always the quickest one. Especially in the case of
many eigenvalues (more than 10) it is the only practical method. The number of the required
eigenvalues depends in turn on the expected excitation frequencies. The simultaneous inverse
vector iteration should be used, if the interest is limited to a few eigenvalues only or if a check
of the number of eigenvalues below a certain frequency is required (Sturm sequence).

The modal shapes are saved like regular load cases. They can be further processed as de-
sired, and then they can be used chiefly with the program DYNA for a dynamic analysis.

For the simultaneous vector iteration the higher eigenvalues converge much more worse than
the lower. Therefore it is reasonable, if enough memory is available, to iterate a few more vec-
tors than one needs. The method is, however, inappropriate for a large number of eigenvalues.

The number of iterations is predetermined by the program. If the convergence is slow, one
should switch generally to the Lanczos method instead of increasing the number of iterations.
The iteration is interrupted, if the number of the maximum iterations is reached or if the max-
imum eigenvalue has changed only by the factor less than 0.00001 opposite to the previous
iteration.

For the method according to Lanczos the number of the Lanczos vectors should be selected
usually twice so large as the number of the desired eigenvalues. An iteration is not necessary
in this case.

Example see ase4_eigenfrequencies.dat

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-89

ASE | Theoretical Principles

Activated mass:

ASE prints three types of activated mass in the output:

1. on earthquake activated effective modal mass X(t) Y(t) Z(t) X(%)...
The sum of percentage of all eigenvalues should reach about 100 %. But the first eigenform
in the above shown tuning fork will give no contribution, because the two legs always swing
in the opposite direction. The first eigenform will not be activated by earthquake.
2. activated or generalized modal mass (%)*
This is not relevant for an earthquake analysis but gives the best results for a tuning fork or
the rotational modes of a building. For the tuning fork the first eigenform will have the
biggest activated mass as most of the mass moves. The sum of percentage is now not
limited to 100 % (a one mass swinger will have 100 % in every global X,Y,Z direction).
See: Schwingungsbemessung von Decken - RWTH Aachen RFS2-CT-2007-00033 page 31
3. Rotation aroud the system center S (%)
is calculated similar to the effective modal mass but with the rotation around the system
center S and the distance to it:

(sm(m ∗ r ∗ _tngent))/ rm2 / sm(m) (2.55)

with mass, r=distance to the system center,

rm=average radius = sum(r*m) /sum(m)

- a critical earthquake eigenform has high values in ’effective modal mass’

- an inner eigenform like a tuning fork torque has high values in ’activated mass’
- torsional eigenforms have high values in ’rotation around S’

How to read the modal participation factors with @KEY from the database is shown in example
ase4_eigenfrequencies.dat

2.16 Buckling Eigenvalues

For buckling eigenvalues only the default method with EIGE ... BUCL should be used:

The Pardiso Solver CTRL SOLV 4 should not be used here as he has problems with determi-

2-90 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Theoretical Principles | ASE

nants going to 0.0. The default solver CTRL SOLV 3 is better for buckling eigenvalues.

If too many or only negative eigenvalues aer found you can choose an automatic eigenvalue
shift with EIGE...LMIN AUTO. Example see buckling_eigenvalue_shift.dat

Simple slab buckling see ase12_buckling_slab.dat

Please notice: there is another nice feature to get buckling eigenvalues e.g. for specific groups,
see figue at FIXT

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ui9qVyoSYZs

2.17 Masses
For dynamis eigenvalues only for beams consistent mass matrix are used - vgl. CTRL MCON.
All other elements use a diagonal mass matrix (lumped mass matrix). See also program DYNA.

In a time step analysis all elements use a diagonal mass matrix .

The mass center is printed in the output. The complete calculated mass vector including the
dead weight can be output with ECHO LOAD EXTR.

A conversion of loads to masses can occur with the record MASS LC.

Example see ase4_eigenfrequencies.dat

In time-step analysis: a1_dynamic_overview.dat

In time step analysis additional masses are applied as dynamic mass and on LC...DLZ 1 also
immediately also as static load, see a1_introduction_earthquake.dat

2.18 Damping Elements

Damping values e.g. in spring elements are considered for the time-step method.

Example see spring_with_damping.dat

exponential: springdampexpo.dat

2.19 Modal Damping and Modal Loads

The modal damping dj is defined as a product of the modal shape i multiplied by the damp-
ing matrix multiplied by the modal shape j. This matrix is not generally diagonal. However,
ASE calculates only the diagonal terms of this matrix and saves them as modal damping val-
ues. Different damping of the individual modal shapes can be calculated easily in this way by
specifying different damping for particular element groups.

For evaluation of modal load, SOFILOAD can multiply a loadvector of an ASE loadcase e.g. 3
with an eigenform e.g. lc 1004 (SOFILOAD: LC 3 rest ; EVAL RU no 1004).

2.20 Dynamic analysis possibilities

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=w1W6xUmH4xk

DYNA is the specialist for modal analyis and linear dynamics.

SOFiSTiK 2025 2-91

ASE | Theoretical Principles

In ASE usually nonlinear dynamic is calculated in a time step analysis.

In a nonlinear time step analysis the complete stress state including dead load must be gener-
ated. It is best to calculate the steady state g_1+g_2 already nonlinear but statically and then
uses this static state as primary loadcase for the nonlinear time step analysis.

As ASE calculates each time step separate we get the opportunity to adjust the
load to the developing displacements. Such an intelligent load is shown in example
step_intelligent_load.dat:

Method 1 we apply a fixed predefined sinus wave.

Problem: we cannot be shure that the system really reacts exactly in the same
frequency as the load frequency. Especially with nonlinear effects or moving
mass the system frequency will change and the fixed load frequency will not
remain in resonance.

Method 2 the intelligend load method applies the positive load only in case a controlling
node goes down and applies a negative load in case the node goes up. So the
load is always pushing the system like on a swing and remains in resonance.
Problem: in method 2 this gives a block load and little peak accelerations on the
load jump.

Method 3 we start a sinus wave cycle when the controlling node jumps from going up to
going down. When the next change comes, the next sinus wave is triggered.
The length of the sinus wave starts with an estimated value and is adjusted in
dependance of the cycles.

An overview to the possibilities with remarks and examples can be found in

a1_dynamic_overview.dat

2-92 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3 Input Description

3.1 Input Language

The input is made in the CADINP language (see general manual SOFiSTiK: ’Basics’).

Three categories of units are distinguished:

mm Fixed unit. Input is always required in the specified unit.

[mm] Explicit unit. Input defaults to the specified unit. Alternatively, an explicit as-
signment of a related unit is possible (eg. 2.5[m] ).

[mm] 1011 Implicit unit. Implicit units are categorised semantically and denoted by a cor-
responding identity number (shown in green). Valid categories referring to the
unit ”length” are, for example, geodetic elevation, section length and thickness.
The default unit for each category is defined by the currently active (design code
specific) unit set. This input default can be overridden as described above. The
specified unit in square brackets corresponds to the default for unit set 5 (Eu-
rocodes, NORM UNIT 5).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-1

ASE | Input Description

3.2 Input Records

The statical system is input with a graphic input program or with the program SOFIMSHA/-
SOFIMSHC. Material values can be modified, however, in ASE.

The input is divided into blocks which are terminated with an END record. A particular sys-
tem or load case can be analysed within each block. The program ends, if an empty block
(END/END) is found.

The following records are defined:

Record Items
CTRL OPT VAL
SYST TYPE PROB ITER TOL FMAX FMIN EMAX
EMIN PLC FACV NMAT STOR CHAM
STEP N DT INT ALF DEL THE LCST
SELE
ULTI STEP FAK1 FAKE DFAK PRO DL PRIM
DMIN
PLOT LC TO NNO DIRE TYPE
CREP NCRE RO T RH TEMP BEAM
GRP NO VAL FACS PLC GAM H K
SIGN SIGH FACL FACD FACT HW
GAMA RADA RADB MODD CS PREX PREY
PHI EPS RELZ PHIF PHIS T1 HING
FACB CSDL MNO
GRP2 NO STEA QUEA QUEX QUEY ALP0 ULUS
QEMX EXPO GEOM
Q8X8 ROW MXX MYY MXY QX QY NXX
NYY NXY FROM TO
ELEM ETYP NO FACS FACL
LEN0 ETYP NO L0 TYPE LC GRP
HIGH XM YM ZM NX NY NZ PR1
PTPR NOG
TBEA NC b
REIQ LCB FACT LCRS CHKR
STEX NAME
OBLI SX SY SZ LC FACV VMAX DIRE
STOR
SLIP NOSL NOG NOEL
Table continued on next page.

3-2 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Record Items
VOLU NO GRP POSI MNO V0 P0 PLC
DV DT MASS
MOVS NO TYPE FROM TO INC L0
LAUN GRP DX DY DZ XM YM
SFIX LC PLC
FIXT REF NO
LC NO FACT DLX DLY DLZ BET2 TITL
TYPE GAMU GAMF PSI0 PSI1 PSI2 PS1S
CRI1 CRI2 CRI3
TEMP NO T1 T2 NOG FACT EMOD RELA
EXPO
PEXT NOG NOEL P0 SIDE BETA MUE SS
LCC NO FACT NOG NFRO NTO NINC ULTI
PLC
EIGE NEIG ETYP NITE MITE LMIN SAVE LC
MASS NO MX MY MZ MXX MYY MZZ
V0 NO VX VY VZ
REIN MOD RMOD LCR ZGRP SFAC P6 P7
P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 TITL
DESI STAT KSV KSB AM1 AM2 AM3 AM4
AMAX SC1 SC2 SS1 SS2 C1 C2
S1 S2 Z1 Z2 SMOD TSV MSCD
KTAU TTOL TANA TANB SCL
NSTR KMOD KSV KSB KMIN KMAX ALPH FMAX
CRAC CW BB HMIN HMAX CW- CHKC
CHKT CHKR FAT SIGS TANS TANC DUMP
ECHO OPT VAL

The records HEAD, END and PAGE are described in the general manual SOFiSTiK: ’Basics’.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-3

ASE | Input Description

3.3 CTRL – Control of the Calculation

See also: ECHO, SYST, GRP, ULTI

CTRL

Item Description Unit Default

OPT Control option LT -

SOLV Solver options for ASE
CORE Parallel computing control
ITER Iteration method
AFIX Handling of movable degrees of freedom
SPRI Consideration of the eccentricity of springs
CABL Cable settings for TH3
BEAM Beam element
WARP Warping torsion
BRIC Control of BRIC elements
QTYP Formulation of QUAD+TENDON elements
CONC Concrete in cracked condition
NLAY Parameters for QUAD layers
ILAY Stresses in inner layern for WINGRAF
FRIC Maximum shear stress QUAD concrete rule
FGXZ Factor on timber fibre-z shear modulus
STII Non-linear beam stiffness
PLAB T-beam components
INPL Inplane stiffnesses

CANT Primary displacements

FIXZ Global and local xy constraint, Formfinding
for membrane structures
STEA Formfinding cable-stayed bridges: normal
force stiffness component of beams
QUEA Formfinding cable-stayed bridges: normal
force stiffness component of QUAD ele-
ments
DIFF Saving of the difference internal forces be-
tween a load case and the primary load
case
SOFT Replacement of rigid supports in dead load
direction with soft spring supports
Table continued on next page.

3-4 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Item Description Unit Default

MCON Activation of a consistant mass matrix

UNRE BEAM prestress from the program TEN-
DON
GIT Reduction of non-linear torsional stiffness
COUP =1 : replace KF couplings with rigid beams
(default in time step dynamics).
Not equal 1.0 : factor

WARN to switch off specific error messages

ELLA CTRL ELLA 0 for a more compact storage
of the $d2 file, but then no ELLA is allowed
to follow. CTRL ELLA 1 : store stiffness.
GRAN Activation of the old GRAN material model
for BRIC non-linear material with GRAN 0
MSTE Number of the Runge-Kutta steps

AXIA, EIGE, AMAX, AGEN, ETOL, IMAX, SVRF,

VRED, SMOO, VM, PIIA, INTE, USEP, VERT,
COUN, ELIM, NLIM, ED: See manual for the pro-
gram AQB

VAL Value of the option − -

V2 possible 2nd value of the option − -
V3 possible 3rd value of the option − -
V4... further options − -
GRP Definition group wise, only for CTRL CABL and CTRL − -
SPRI

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-5

ASE | Input Description

3.3.1 SOLV Equation solver

SOLV Description Unit Default

VAL Selection of equation solver − 3

1 Direct Skyline Solver
(Gauss/ Cholesky)
2 Iterative Sparse Solver
3 Direct Sparse LDL Solver
4 Direct Parallel Sparse Solver (PARDISO)

For solving the equation systems of the Finite-Element problem, SOFiSTiK provides a number
of solvers. Which solver is used best depends highly on the type of the system and requires
knowledge of relevant system parameters. Following types are available:

• Direct Skyline Solver (Gauss/Cholesky)

This is the classical solver of the FE-Method. The current implementation works best on
a skyline oriented matrix. The storage needed depends on the internal optimization of the
node numbers and may become quite large for 3D structures.
• Iterative Solver (Conjugate Gradients)
One advantage of the iterative solver lies in its reduced requirements for storage, but it
may also provide reduced computing time compared to the previous two types especially
in case of large volume structures.
• Direct Sparse Solver
These types of solvers correspond to state of technology. A quite efficient version based
on the work of Davis [27] is available as well as a direct parallel solver PARDISO.

The advantage of the direct solvers is especially given in case of multiple right hand sides, as
the effort for solving them is very small compared to the triangulization of the equation system.
Thus they are the first choice for any dynamic analysis or in case of many load cases.

In order to minimize computational effort, the solvers need an optimized sequence of equation
numbers. This optimization step is usually performed during system generation. The programs
SOFIMSHA/C by default always create a sequence which is suitable for the direct sparse solver
(3). The solvers (1) or (2) however require a skyline oriented numbering which may be obtained
using the option (CTRL OPTI 1) or (CTRL OPTI 2) during system generation. The correct
setting will be checked and a warning will be issued in case a correct numbering is not available.

The iterative (CTRL SOLV 2) and the parallel sparse solver (CTRL SOLV 4) can be run in par-
allel providing an additional reduction in computing time. A parallelization basically requires
a license of type ”HISOLV”. More information about parallelization can be found in subsec-
tion 3.3.2 describing the input parameter (CTRL CORE).

The equation solvers are selected using the parameter (CTRL SOLV). The first value defines
the type of the solver, followed by optional additional parameters.

Direct Skyline Solver (Gauss/ Cholesky)

3-6 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

SOLV Description Unit Default

VAL 1 Direct Skyline Solver (Gauss/ Cholesky) − !

No additional parameters are required. However it is mandatory to optimize the equation num-
bers in SOFIMSHA/C using (CTRL OPTI 1) or (CTRL OPTI 2) in order to minimize computation
time as well as storage requirements.

Iterative equation solver

SOLV Description Unit Default

VAL 2 Iterative equation solver − !

V2 Maximum number of iterations − *

V3 Tolerance in numeric digits (5 to 15) − *
V4 Type of preconditioning: − 1
0 Diagonal Scaling (not recommended)
1 Incomplete Cholesky
2 Incomplete Inverse

V5 Threshold value of preconditioning − *

V6 Maximum bandwidth in preconditioning − *

The iterative solver uses a conjugate gradient method in combination with preconditioning. For
the preconditioning, following variants are supported:

• Diagonal scaling (V4=0)

Although this is the fastest method with the least memory requirements, it will need a
considerable high amount of iterations and is therefore not recommended in most cases.
• Incomplete Cholesky (V4=1)
This type of preconditioning performs a partial triangulization of the input matrix. Compared
to a full triangulization with the Cholesky method, the Incomplete Cholesky saves time by
ignoring the so called Fill-In during decomposition.
• Incomplete Inverse (V4=2)
This type of preconditioning is generally inferior to the Cholesky method. This applies to
the convergence-rate as well as the time required for computing the inverses. It shows
however better performance in case of more densely populated matrices (Recommended
threshold V5: 0.01).

For any kind of preconditioning the number of matrix entries taken into account during precon-
ditioning can be reduced either by giving a relative threshold value at V5 or via a maximum
bandwidth size at V6. The optimum choice depends on the type of the structure and may only
be found by some tests.

Hint

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-7

ASE | Input Description

(Hint continued...)

The correctness of the solution of the iterative solver depends primarily on the tolerance
threshold. Therefore, changing the default setting V3 is not recommended. In any case
the analyst should carry out a proper assessment of the computation results.

Direct Sparse LDL Solver (Default)

SOLV Description Unit Default

VAL 3 Direct Sparse LDL Solver − !

Additional parameters are not required. The mesh generators SOFiMSHA/C generate by de-
fault an equation numbering required for this type of solver which minimizes the so-called Fill
In of the matrix.

PARDISO - direct parallel sparse solver

SOLV Description Unit Default

WERT 4 Direct parallel sparse solver − !

This solver PARDISO uses processor optimized high performance libraries from the Intel Math
Kernel Library MKL. It usually provides the least computing times. It does not require an a
priori optimization of the equation numbers during system generation. Hence, the equation
optimization in SOFiMSHA/C could also be deactivated using (CTRL OPTI 0) in order to save
memory during system generation. On the other hand however, this solver does not allow
reusing the factorized stiffness matrix in other programs. Thus, a usage in combination with
the program ELLA is not possible.

Further options
CTRL SOLV 0 suppresses the solution of the system. This is a useful feature to check the
effective system loads.

STEU SOLV 999 prevents a rebuild of the stiffness matrix within a load case loop in each step.

3.3.2 CORE Parallel computation control

CORE Description Unit Default

VAL Number of used threads − *

SOFiSTiK supports parallel computing for selected equation solvers. Additionally, some pro-
grams offer parallel element processing capabilities – independent of the chosen equation
solver (CTRL SOLV).

Activation of parallel computing

By default parallel computing is triggered automatically where it is feasible.

3-8 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Parallel computing requires corresponding hardware and operation system support. In addi-
tion, availability of an adequate SOFiSTiK license is obligatory.

Hint
Parallel computing requires availability of a HISOLV license (ISOL granule).

Number of available threads for parallel computing

If parallel computing is active, the number of adopted threads is determined as follows (listed
with increasing priority):

a) The software retrieves the information about the number of available physical processor
cores on the system. This number defines the default number of threads that are used
when a parallel computation is activated.
b) This default can be modified via the environment variable SOF_NUM_THREADS, which is
also available as sofistik.def parameter.
c) Finally, an explicit statement CTRL CORE NN (or as relative input CTRL CORE NN[%])
temporarily assigns the number of available threads for the respective run.

Hint
Neither option b) nor option c) state an explicit parallel computation request. The deci-
sion if a parallel computation is triggered, depends on the actual analysis option (parallel
processing must be supported for the specific task) and the availability of an adequate
license. Parallel computing can be suppressed by explitly setting the number of available
threads to 1 (or 0).

Parallel options for equation solvers

License
Solver CTRL SOLV Serial Parallel
Skyline Gauss/ Cholesky 1 – n.a.
Iterativ 2 HISOLV HISOLV
Sparse LDL (default) 3 – n.a.
Sparse Parallel (Pardiso) 4 HISOLV HISOLV

3.3.3 ITER Iteration method for the elimination of residual forces

VAL 0 Crisfield method
VAL 1 Linesearch method
VAL +2 An update of the tangential stiffness occurs, if required.
VAL 3 1+2
Default:
- for PROB NONL: VAL 0 = Crisfield method
- for PROB NONL and non-linear springs:

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-9

ASE | Input Description

VAL 3
- for PROB TH3: VAL 3 = Linesearch with tang. stiffness
V2 1 for every step stiffness update
V2 x interval stiffness update is extended to x steps
Default: dependent on the system size
With an input for V2 failure mechanisms can be calculated well for second-order and
third-order theory. ASE shows a better iteration in possible failure mode shapes with
following input (possible also without PLC):

CTRL ITER 2 V2 1 $ new total stiffness after every step $

SYST PROB TH3 ITER -30 PLC 15 $ -30 : simple residual force iteration
$

Then the iteration load cases 9001-9030 determine the failure mechanism.
V3 x Update of the AQB stiffness in every xth step with CTRL ITER 3 V3 x
Default: 4-8 depending on the number of iterations
V4 x Smooth change of updated stiffness in the first x iterations. On TH2, TH3 or WARP
sometimes an unrealistic normal force in the first iterations leads to negative stiff-
ness.
Default: no smoothing - full updated stiffness also in first iteration
V5 x bits for variations of Chrisfield acceleration
+1 also accelerate going downhill
+2 high acceleration also in high iterations
Default: 0 - Standard Chrisfield
V6 0 no damping of updated spring stiffness in iterations
V6 1 damping method 1
V6 2 damping method 2 (incremental launching)
Default: V6 2

Comments on updated stiffness:

ASE does not make a new material nonlinear stiffness for quads and brics but only iterates
residual forces. Workflow:
- calculate the nonlinear forces that every quad carries according the actual displacements
- builds the total force sum that all quads and elements can carry
- compares it with the external load
- gets a difference = residual force
- adjustes the displacements according a Chrisfield acceleration or Linesearch acceleration
- goes back to “calculate the forces” until equilibrium is reached

A new stiffness is only made due to the geometric stiffness in TH3. And springs get an updated
soft stiffness if they are cracked (better cracking or lifting of slabs).

3.3.4 AFIX movable degrees of freedom

Recognizable undefined degrees of freedom (e.g. node rotations of a truss) are assigned
a priori a small stiffness. Loads which act on such degrees of freedom cause very large

3-10 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

displacements.

Instability check: If the solver detects an instability, 6 single load cases are calculated au-
tomatically for the graphical checks under the consideration of dynamic auxiliary stiffnesses.
Furthermore the first three eigenvalues are calculated with the same auxiliary stiffness. An
input unequal to 1 for CTRL AFIX turns off this instability check.

0 Degrees of freedom which are movable exactly get announced by an error message.
The calculation is interrupted.
1 Degrees of freedom which are movable within the numeric accuracy get announced
by an error message. The calculation is interrupted. The instability check is realized.
2 Degrees of freedom which are movable exactly are not used and get a warning. The
calculation is continued.
3 Degrees of freedom which are movable within the numeric accuracy are not used
and get a warning. The calculation is continued.
4 as 0, however, recognizable undefined degrees of freedom get a rigid support.
5 as 1, however, recognizable undefined degrees of freedom get a rigid support.
6 as 2, however, recognizable undefined degrees of freedom get a rigid support.
7 as 3, however, recognizable undefined degrees of freedom get a rigid support.

Default: 1

3.3.5 SPRI Spring options

+1 and +8: Consideration of the eccentricity of springs.
Coupling spring elements can account for the real distance of the nodes with an implicit KP
kinematic constraint. A transverse spring force will transfer a moment to the nodes. Without
+1 and +8 the transverse force is transported without a moment - which is mechanically not
correct, Fig. 3.1.
Left with CTRL SPRI 0: the transverse spring transports the force down without creating a
bending moment (M=0).
Right with CTRL SPRI - (default) with the excentricity a correct moment is generated:

P P

Figure 3.1: Bending moment equilibrium: left CTRL SPRI 0 (M=0) - right CTRL SPRI default

You can best illustrate the effect of CTRL SPRI 1 if you assume that each a short vertical beam
goes up to the middle. The transverse spring then connects the ends of these beams and
works like a horizontal spring without excentricity. Then you clearly see that the transverse
spring force creates a bending moment in the beam = spring force * half distance:

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-11

ASE | Input Description

Figure 3.2: Effect illustrated with two short vertical beams

+4: direction change of coupling springs.

0/4 pure 0: do NOT apply excentricity of springs from real distance, couplings springs
behave like a truss and can change the force direction
So usually on TH3, CTRL SPRI 4 is better than CTRL SPRI 0 as +4 is mostly
senseful on TH3 (coupling spring keep their direction)
+1/5 apply excentricity in any case
Usually on TH3, CTRL SPRI 1+4 is better than CTRL SPRI 1 as +4 is mostly sense-
ful on TH3 (coupling spring keep their direction)
+8 automatic decision:
For BRIC and inplane-QUAD connections the eccentricity is not applied, because
in that cases a smeared friction is assumed and QUADs and BRICs cannot transfer
such bending moments. The eccentricity effect is also not applied for truss and
cable connections without beam connections.
+4 coupling springs in geometric nonlinear analysis:
With +4 a coupling spring will always keep its direction - and not work like a truss. +4
is the perfect default for transvers free bridge bearings. If the direction of a coupling
spring does not fit to the direction of the nodal connection vector, the spring will
always keep its direction! Normally a direction fixed spring should be defined with
nodes with the same coordinate ( distance 0).

V4 With CTRL SPRI V4 sliding friction and stiction can be separated. The normal spring
friction value is used for stiction. In case of sliding a reduced value is used with 0.7,
e.g. for CTRL FEDE V4 0.7. Beispiel sliding_friction.dat
W5 With default V5=0 the offset moment due to a transverse displacement of a spring
is not taken into account for a roller bearing.
This offset moment can only be applied if the spring has also a soft CT transverse
stiffness (<= 1.0 kN/m). So in case you need this offset moment please input a small
CT transverse stiffness, e.g. CT 0.001.
CTRL SPRI V5=1 : friction bearing at node 1, moment appears at node 2
CTRL SPRI V5=2 : friction bearing at node 2, moment appears at node 1
CTRL SPRI V5=3 : rolling bearing contact in the middle between node 1 and node

3-12 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

2
Can be switched on e.g. with CTRL SPRI V5 3.

Default: CTRL SPRI 8+4 V2 0 V4 1.0 V5 0

VAL can also be defined group wise with e.g. CTRL SPRI 0+4 ; CTRL SPRI 1+4 GRP 7.
V2,V4,V5 can not be set group wise.

3.3.6 CABL Cable handling

0 No consideration of the internal cable sag
1 Consideration of the internal cable sag on SYST PROB TH3 and NONB (not on TH2)
The consideration is also done for cables with FACS not equal 1.0 (formfinding).

Default: 1 Can also be defined group wise with e.g. CTRL CABL 0 ; CTRL CABL 1 GRP 5 .

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PmAeevUeJcU

3.3.7 BEAM Beam element

2 simple haunched beams without implicit spring hinges
3 complex excentric beam element mit haunches, beam cuts, implicit hinges, complex
loading, warping and Tendon prestress
5 simple prismatic beams are treated quicker, normal beams automatically with BEAM
3. Fallback is 3.

Default: BEAM 3, on TH3 BEAM 5

V2 With CTRL BEAM V2 the default value of 1.70 for the plastic interaction on NSTR PL
or PLD can be changed, e.g. CTRL BEAM V2 1.80 see NSTR - Non-linear Material
Analysis in ASE

3.3.8 WARP Warping torsion

1 activates the warping torsion with formulation of a seventh degree of freedom per
node.

Default: 0

3.3.9 BRIC Control for BRIC elements

1 use normal BRIC element
2 use BRIC element with hyperplastic rubber material Total Lagrangian
4 Tetraeder with quadratic edge shape functions (Hexaedern as 1)
then option V5: (default V5=1+2+4+8+32)
+1 : suppress higher shape functions at supported edges
+2 : ” at elastic supported quad areas
+4 : ” in case of adjacent Hexaeder
+8 : ” at elastic supported edges (springs)
+16: ” at edges with additional beam elements
+32: ” at edges to quad elements with stiffness

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-13

ASE | Input Description

+16 CTRL BRIC 17 = on TH3 use BRIC elements geometric linear

Default: BRIC 4

CTRL BRIC 4 V6 : V6=tensile strength only in z-direction on LADE yielding (columns)

Can also be defined group wise with e.g. CTRL BRIC 1 GRP 5 .

3.3.10 QTYP Formulation of QUAD elements and tendons

The various additional options of the QUAD elements are defined as the sum of the following
values:

VAL 0 standard element

VAL 1 non-conforming formulation
VAL +10 use of rotational masses (dynamic only)

Default: 1

If Tendon parts are not assigned to a quad element in TENDON, it must be defined how
these parts shall be treated - as a hole or external tendon. You should also check if it
is better to use real cable elements for such extern QUAD tendons (see PEXT and ex-
tern_prestress_cables.dat) :

V2 0 These parts are interpreted as hole without force

V2 1 These parts are treated as external tendons with acting force (are not taken into
account in SIR cuts)<

Default: 1

Figure 3.3: Tendon going through a hole with QTYP V2 1

3.3.11 CONC Concrete in cracked condition

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QsGEUu1UGEU

For QUAD+BRIC elements:

3-14 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

The length of the decreasing part of the concrete stress-strain curve in the tensile zone can be
changed with CTRL CONC VAL (Quad+Bric):

VAL 0.2 defines this length to 0.2 per mille

VAL 0 The length is determined from the tensilefailure energy. This energy is not limited
with 5·eps1 as in the default (without an input for CTRL CONC).

CTRL CONC V2: the increase of the maximum concrete compressive stress for uniaxial com-
pression according to Kupfer/Rüsch is deactivated as a precaution for calculations according
to ultimate limit state (only Quad):

V2 0 no limitation, increase permissible, default for NSTR KSV SL, SLD

V2 1 maximum concrete compressive stress = 1.0 · value from uniaxial AQUA stress-
strain curve, default for NSTR UL, ULD, CAL, CALD
V3 temporarily sets the concrete strength fct for the QUAD concrete material law
V3 = tensile strength for tension stiffening (Quad+Bric)
V4 temporarily sets the concrete strength fctk for the QUAD material law [ N/mm2]
V4 = tensile strength for pure concrete layers ((Quad+Bric)
Should be reduced for ULS analysis.

The method of tension stiffening is controlled with CONC V5 (only Quad):

V5 525 plates in cracked condition exactly according to Heft 525 DAfStb (Eurocode)
V5 400 plates in cracked condition exactly according to Heft 400 DAfStb (old EC2)
without input: for SL,SLD: Heft 400 with modifications for realistic deflection, for UL,ULD: Heft
525

V6 Reduction of concrete compression strength due to transverse tension

Input per cent e.g. :
CTRL CONC V6 85 = max. reduction 85%
CTRL CONC V6 100 = no reduction
CTRL CONC W6 40 = depending on the main strain eps-1 according prEN annex G
(G.9)
default V6=75 (refer to BEMESS CTRL TENS)

V7 Computation on singular support points in the material nonlinear concrete analysis

(SYST NMAT YES):
Problem: such singular supports caused singular forces that could not be carried
in the concrete nonlinear material model, especially in combination with singular
rotational constraints.
At punching nodes from BEMESS now a first singular support or connection force
(and bending moment) will be distributed on neighbouring nodes inside the column
perimeter to simulate a constant distributed support pressure. Thus the feature
only works after a BEMESS ultmate design with PUNC YES or PUNC CHEK! The
support force of the center is distributed via an internal coupling ring around the
center node and elastic springs to further nodes inside the column area.
The processing is documented in the statistik print out "rounding singular punching
nodes". It can be switched off with CTRL CONC V7 0. It only works on BEMESS

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-15

ASE | Input Description

punching nodes but also if they come from beam connections in a 3D analysis.
It also converts singular connection bending moments in a triangular connection
pressure. The effect can be studied well by comparing a run with CTRL CONC V7
0 and a run with CTRL CONC V7 1. Especially at fine discretized punching points a
rotational constraints will be analyzed more realistic (stronger). On such points the
singular support moment caused a strong singular curvature in the fine mesh and
thus a lower constraint.
In a material linear analysis this feature is switched off by default but can be enforced
with CTRL CONC V7 1.

V8 Nonlinear creep in the nonlinear quad concrete model

0=no, 1=yes starting at 0.45*fck, 2=yes starting at 0.4*fcm
1: Depending on the stress, delta-phi is individually increased in every gauss point
and every layer (and so also separate in the boundary fiber) using the equation in
the EN 1992-1-1 german Annex C equation (3.7) with:
e(1.5*(ksig-0.45)) with ksig=(sigma/fck)

2: according new prEN 1992-1-1 Eurocode 2 (2020) 5.1.5(3) and annex B.3
(6) page 275 with e(1.5*(ksig-0.40)) and ksig=(sigma/fcm)
default V8=1
example a1_nonlinear_creep.dat

V9 Analysis of crack width on skew cracks

0,1,2,11,12 same meaning as BEMESS-CRAC-SAND Sandwichmodel
Default in ASE is 1 = realistic analysis but without |e2|

V10 Maximum reinforcement steel stress in the LADE-BRIC concrete model in N/mm2

BRIC yield criteria for non-linear concrete application:

A decreasing tensile strength curve can be chosen with the additional input CTRL CONC
EPSY. Here EPSY is interpreted as uniaxial strain length of the decreasing part of the stress
strain-curve in per mille (e.g. CTRL CONC 0.1). The input is possible for the BRIC yield criteria
MOHR, LADE and GUDEHUS. Without the input of CTRL CONC the tensile strength is treated
as a constant yielding value. A special case is LADE - here the length of the decreasing tensile
strength can be input in AQUA NMAT LADE with P6 and then an additional input with ASE
CTRL CONC is not allowed. For ASE we recommend to input the length of the decreasing part
for LADE in AQUA. Example see bric_concrete.dat

3.3.12 NLAY Number of layers for QUAD layers

For fire analysis, implemented for QUAD shell elements. With SOFILOAD now nonlinear tem-
perature gradients can be defined via QUAD...TYPE=’T’...Z0 and plottet in the ANIMATOR
element info after the analysis. Then ASE can use non-linear temperature curves (AQUA
ARBL...TEMP) in the QUAD layers. An input of CTRL NLAY V2 V3 V4 is necessary and allows
addional settings:

VAL Number of layers

V2 +1 fine layers on positive local z axis
V2 +2 higher layer refinement on +z

3-16 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

V2 +3 extreme refinement on +z
V2 -1 bis -3 : refinement on negative local z axis
Default: 0 = constant division
V3 start temperature in the quad layers
Default: 20 degree celsius
The non-linear temperature strain behaviour is taken into account and plotted in the
URSULA output.
V4 1 Take alfa-t value from material input (CONC-ALFA) and not from work law SSLA-
EPST.
Default: V4=0.
V5 1 Concrete uses the maximum temperature found up to now in a layer and does not
cure on falling temperature.
Default: V5=1.
V8 Cut plot of stress strain curve not before V8 promille. e.g. V8 80 - plot steel curve
up to 80 promille.
V9 With V9 a temperature for the plot of the work law can be input, e.g. V9 600.,
+10000 e.g. 10100=every 100 degree.

Example see quads_on_fire_1.dat

3.3.13 ILAY Store stresses of inner layers for WINGRAF

Up to now WINGRAF can only plot the stress on top and on bottom of the quads = stress of first
and last layer. With CTRL ILAY 20000 you can store the stresses on the surface of the inner
layers to plot them in WINGRAF. May be you analyzed loadcase 301, then following loadcases
will be created:
LC 20301: stress on top of upside layer 2 and surface stress of second bottom layer
LC 30301: layer 3 upside and third layer downside (surface of the layers)
LC 40301: layer 4 upside and forth layer downside
...

LC − 301 − top − stress

LC − 20301 − top − stress

LC − 30301 − top − stress

LC − 30301 − bottom − stress

LC − 20301 − bottom − stress

LC − 301 − bottom − stress

Figure 3.4: Storage of stresses of inner layers for WINGRAF

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-17

ASE | Input Description

3.3.14 FRIC Maximum allowable shear stress for the QUAD concrete rule
For point supported slabs the allowable shear stress is exceeded often in support-near ele-
ments. It results in shear plastification. For this shear plastification the punching information
of BEMESS is taken into account in a non-linear slab analysis. At punching node, the shear
plasticity check will be switched off inside an radius of column-edge+hm. Thus an increase of
FRIC to for example 9.9 N/mm2 for elimination of these sometimes unwanted shear plastifica-
tion effects is only necessary in special cases.

Default: bond stress FBD from AQUA

V2 final stress.
With e.g. CTRL FRIC 4.00 V2 1.40 a descending final max. allowable shear stress
(here 1.40 N/mm2) can be defined. The stiffness in the descending part is equal to
the increasing one.

3.3.15 STII Linear beam stiffness factor in a nonlinear analysis

T-beams (beams) are calculated linear in a normal non-linear slab calculation with SYST NMAT
YES (without NSTR S1). In this case an overall reduction of the beam stiffness is done. The
input CTRL STII 0.4 for example processes concrete beams with 40 % stiffness. A normal force
stiffness is not used then. For slab calculations (program SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC ... SYST
GIRD) according to cracked condition STII is preset with 0.25 (0.75*1/(1+phi) with phi=2.0)..
The default is 1.0 for all other calculations. Steel beams or beams with other material than
concrete are not influenced.

Using nonlinear T-beams in combination with a quad slab is problematic due to the change
of centre of stiffness in cracked beams and the elongation of beams due to crack open-
ing. In such a case it is better to use only excentric quad elements as shown in example
csm32_slab_design.dat

3.3.16 PLAB T-beam philosophy

The plate components are deducted automatically during the stiffness calculation for beams
inside plates with cross section widths defined in the program AQUA. The dead load is adjusted
to avoid double dead load. The components of the plate internal forces are added then to the
results of the beam internal forces for a subsequent dimensioning.
(is not valid in method with excentric beams see TBEX)

Restrictions:

• Processing only for cross sections with defined cross section outline (SREC,SECT...) which
were defined with the program AQUA. Also composite sections are allowed. The acting
width is taken from the concrete parts only.

Details:

• During the calculation of plate components the plate internal forces at the beam nodes are
multiplied by the cross section width. Therefore, the beam width should not be chosen too
large above columns.
(is not valid in method with excentric beams see TBEX)
• If some QUAD groups meet at a node, the average value of the plate internal forces is used.

3-18 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Control:

+1 moments My are added

+2 shear forces Vz are added too
+4 axial forces N are added too
+8 torsional moments MT are added too

Default: 7 = My + Vz + N

The processing is cancelled with CTRL PLAB 0

V2: With Ctrl PLAB V2 1 also the next quad node rigth and left is used to evaluate the
added quad forces (to take into account the quad force distribution more acccurate). With Ctrl
PLAB V2 0 only the central node is used.

Default: 1

Output:

• The plate components are included always in the output of the beam internal forces and
moments. Therefore the printout does not occur before the plate node results!
• A statistic of the plate components follows after the beam internal forces and moments.
The maximum plate components are compared with the maximum beam internal forces.

Control of the statistic with the input ECHO PLAB 0-1-2.

Attention: This model can not be used for influence line evaluation with ELLA because ELLA
does not add the slab parts to the beam!
This only works with the mothod with excentric beams see TBEX) Examples see also Theoret-
ical Principles.

3.3.17 INPL Inplane stiffnesses: Connecting beams to quads

The decisive connection nodes for the beam and disk elements are searched for the transfer
of the moments around the local z axis. The stiffnesses of the bordering QUAD elements are
increased by an inplane moment spring. The appropriate node numbers are printed. The
method can be switched off with CTRL INPL 0. With CTRL INPL V3 0 this inplane stiffness is
only switched off at quad edges with smeared springs or couplings.

Following a case where automatically stiff inplane springs are inserted:

Figure 3.5: skew frame bridge with superstructure beams

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-19

ASE | Input Description

We expect a fixed-end moment MY in the beam, but this would be separated in two moments
in the wall: in a M-yy (around lokal x, lokale quad y-axis may show down) and a moment
M-inplane around the local z-axis of the quads:

M − yy
MY
M − npne


y

Figure 3.6: Equilibrium of moments at the connection node

But a pure quad cannot carry such an inplane moment, see figure ??)

Without further action (or with CTRL INPL 0) the connection node would rotate around the local
z-axis and could not carry a fixed-end moment MY in the beam. The result would be:

Figure 3.7: CTRL INPL 0: no fixed-end moment MY in the beam

But by default (or with CTRL INPL 1) ASE automatically inserts stiff inplane springs in the quads
at the decisive connection nodes. They connect the rotation of this node with the displacement
of neighboring quad nodes K2 (like the spring in an old mechanical watch):

3-20 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

K2

oc − z

Figure 3.8: stiff inplane spring to avoid rotation around local z

In the picture only one stiff inplane spring is shown but ASE creates springs to all neighboring
quad nodes. With this a fixed-end moment MY can develop in the beam and we get:

Figure 3.9: CTRL INPL 1: creates fixed-end moment MY in the beam

Another example would be: a beam just attaches to one node of a quad disc. The automatically
inserted inplane springs work as if the beam would be extended to the next neighboring quad
nodes:

In generel we recommend to not connect a beam to a single quad node. Please use at least
two nodes. E.g. you can insert a stiff beam without dead load into the quad disc.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-21

ASE | Input Description

Figure 3.10: Beam at quad disc -> INPL -> as if beam would stick a little bit into the disc

With CTLR INPL value these real inplane springs can be factorized, e.g. CTLR INPL 0.5.

Very weak internal rotational springs are also always inserted at all quad shell elements to
prevent the nodes to rotate around their local z axis. These weak internal INPLANE springs
can be scaled e.g. with CTRL INPL V2 10.0 in case the local phi-z rotations increase highly on
huge numbers of iterations or time steps.

3.3.18 CANT cantilever construction

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=taaBfPlIRGA

If new groups and new nodes are activated for instance in cantilevering construction, a primary
displacement has to be determined for these new nodes, although they were not still available
in the primary load case SYST PLC. Using complex FE cantilever parts, the parts sometimes
distorted too much. Thus the new member is attached as a whole (block) freely of stress. This
can be controlled with CTRL CANT. Usage see program CSM Construction Stage Manager,
see pictures in the CSM manual on CTRL CANT.

0 no action
1 only consideration of displacements
2 consideration of displacements and rotations = tangential cantilevering construction
3 adaption of a new segment in its shop shape (only if using CSM), example:
csm7_cant_3.dat
see pictures in the CSM manual on CTRL CANT
4 fit final segment - see csm7_krag_3.dat
see pictures in the CSM manual on CTRL CANT
5,6,7 as 1:3 (+4) but retention of the XY position
11,12 In analog mode to 1 and 2 with the feature:
It adds a new part not as a block but each node separate. This allows much better
to add an in situ slab on an already deformed grid of beam elements.
21,22 as 11 or 12 but without taking into account couplings

An input CANT>0 sets CTRL INPL to 0

Default: CANT 0 = no action

3-22 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.3.19 FIXZ Global or local xy constraint

Formfinding membrane structures:

For membrane elements and FACS < 1.1E-5 (CTRL FIXZ V3) a formfinding is calculated.
Then the program tries to avoid swimming of inner membrane nodes in the membrane plane:

1 same as FIXZ=6
2 same as FIXZ=6
3 fixes generally all nodes in global XY = formfinding in global Z can be used also for
a cable nets
4 same as FIXZ=6
5 same as FIXZ=6
6 Mesh Control in the membrane formfindung: after every FE iteration step the mesh
of the internal membrane nodes is relaxed separately (optimized)
CTRL FIXZ V2 = number if intern Mesh Control steps, default=9 CTRL FIXZ V3 =
border to use Mesh Control, default=1.1E-5
0 no such effects

After a formfinding calculation an additional calculation should occur with a stiffness factor
multiplied by 1.0 in order to balance possible residual forces in the membrane plane and to
update the load vector for the new geometry.

Default: 6

3.3.20 STEA normal force stiffness component of beams

With CTRL STEA the normal force stiffness component of beams can be increased. The
bending stiffness remains unchangeable. STEA can also use groupwise in GRP2 Example
see suspension_bridge_formfinding.dat

3.3.21 QUEA EA part of the QUAD elements

With CTRL QUEA the E·A part of the QUAD elements can be modified. QUEA can also use
groupwise in GRP2 Example see steel_composite_orto.dat

3.3.22 DIFF difference forces

With CTRL DIFF the difference forces (and displacements) between a load case and the pri-
mary load case are saved (nodal displacement differences = difference to SYST PLC load
case!). With that for instance the difference results (e.g. the part from creep and shrinkage)
are immediately available for a superposition in the program AQB. Only a multiple of thousand
is allowed. Usage see program CSM Construction Stage Manager.
With V2 the secondary effect of prestress is treated via CSM.

3.3.23 SOFT soft spring support

Replacement of rigid supports in dead load direction with soft spring supports, also for linear
analysis If in a graphical input a rigid line support was defined for simplification purposes, this
rigid support can be changed subsequently into a soft edge support. The support width is

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-23

ASE | Input Description

considered here. However, single supports get a factor which is increased with the spring
value multiplied with 5, therefore 5·support area·SOFT. The value SOFT is here the bedding
value in kN/m3 . Values which are smaller than 1000 are not possible. CTRL SOFT can be
input also simultaneously for a non-linear analysis with corners which are displaced upwards
(see SYST PROB LIFT).

Default: 5E7

3.3.24 MCON Activation of a constant mass matrix

For eigenvalue analysis with solver LANC, SIMU and RAYL a consistant mass matrix is acti-
vated with default CTRL MCON 2 (implemented for beam elements only). MCON 3 includes
warping effects. On MCON 1 all rotational masses are suppressed - this should only be used
for special cases when rotational eigenvalues are not of interest.

3.3.25 UNRE BEAM prestress from program TENDON

1 Only the static determinate (primary) part of prestress is stored. The curvature loads
are not used.
-1 Only the static indeterminate part (secondary or hyperstatic part) is calculated and
stored.
0 The static indeterminate part is calculated and stored together with the static deter-
minate part. The beam internal forces and moments includes both parts (= default).

example see bridge_design_manual_aqb.dat

3.3.26 GIT non-linear torsional stiffness

Additional reduction of non-linear torsional stiffness for lateral buckling analysis (NSTR S1).
See example: aseaqb_3_lateral_buckling_traglast.dat

V2: additional rotational damping of beam elements in der time step analysis in kNm/m/rad/sec.
Especially for dynamic relaxation of active bending beams.

3.3.27 MSTE Runge-Kutta steps for non-linear material

MSTE acts only for the yield criteria for BRIC elements.

Default: 4

Explanations can be found in the TALPA manual. In many examples the program converges
better with MSTE= -110.

3-24 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.4 SYST – Global Control Parameters

See also: CTRL, GRP, ULTI

SYST

Item Description Unit Default

TYPE Control option LT *

* This input is not analyzed, the value is taken over
from generation program.
PAIN and AXIA only run with TALPA.
PROB Type of the analysis LT LINE
LINE Linear analysis
NONL material nonlinear springs, cables on pres-
sure, bedding. Cracked quads and brics re-
quire additional NMAT YES (see below)
NONB as NONL +cables with inner sagging
TH2 Second order (P-Delta e.g. columns)
TH3 Full geometric nonlinear, buckling
equilibrium in deformed shape
TH3B Limited TH3 (beams only TH2)
LIFT Plates with lifting corners
ITER Number of iterations − 90
TOL Iteration tolerance − 0.001
The tolerance refers to the maximum load of analysis.
value multiplied with maximum nodal load gener-
ates the tolerance limit for residual forces
-value Absolute tolerance limit in kN
TOL4 tolerance after 40 % iterations − -
TOL8 tolerance after 80 % iterations − -
FMAX Max. f value Crisfield method > 0.25 − 4.00
FMIN Min. f value Crisfield method > 0.1 − 0.25
PLC Primary load case of the system − -
FACV Factor for displacements of PLC − *
Default 1.0, for buckling eigenvalue analysis:
for geometric nonlinear PLC: 1.0
otherwise for buckling: 0.0
VMAX Factor for imperfection − -
NMAT Nonlinear material for QUAD and BRIC elements LT NO
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-25

ASE | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

YES nonlinearity used if available, quad only

concrete,steel+textile, bric only soil
NO quad and bric material behave linear.
STOR Geometry update LT NO
CHAM Precamber in connection with program CSM − -
POST 1 = post itereation: if possible after a first iteration a − 0
postiteration is started using the same load level. This
reduces residual forces and achieves better equilib-
rium in most cases
FMA4 lower FMAX from 0.4*ITER iterations to 0.6*ITER − -
FMA8 lower FMAX after 0.8*ITER iterations − -
for cracked quads possible: FMA4 0.5 FMA8 0.25

Non-linear analyses are not possible with the basic version of program.

Further explanations to PROB:

LINE linear analysis

NONL material nonlinear analysis - see also table after recort NSTR
- non-linear springs, cable failure on compression
- non-linear pile bedding, tension cut off for QUAD bedding
- non-linear halfspace contact
- additional material nonlinearities:
- worklaw curves for springs, beams, cables, truss require record NSTR
- cracked concrete and yielding steel QUADs require SYST NMAT YES
- soil yield criteria for BRIC volume elements require SYST NMAT YES
NONB = NONL + inner cable sagging (cable stayed bridges)
springs can be set linear with GRP LINE
TH2 = NONL + analysis according to the second-order theory for calculation of
columns and frames according to the second-order theory (P-D-delta)
Beam elements are calculated with TH2 with a iteration method in analog mode
to STAR2 (the normal ASE iteration method with residual forces is used for TH3
or CTRL ITER 3)
TH3 = NONL + geometrically non-linear analysis contains TH2 and additionally the
effects of the geometrical system modification, e.g. snape through, length mod-
ification for big deformations, shell buckling
On TH2-TH3 Difference see Theoretical Background - Beam Element
TH3B = NONL + TH2 + effects of the geometrical system modification only for cables,
trusses and springs (CTRL SPRI) with kinematic constraint. Beams and QUAD
elements are used only according to the second-order theory.
LIFT Analysis of plates with corners which are displaced upwards A non-linear anal-
ysis is started, at which also fixed supports and elastic edges can be displaced
upwards due to tension; see CTRL SOFT

3-26 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Examples:

SYST PROB LINE: Input file

ASE introduction ase1_overview.dat
BEMESS slab design bemess6_design.dat
CSM prestressed bridge csm31_design.dat
SYST PROB NONL: Input file
Spring work law a1_spring_overview.dat
Beam Ship impact plastic ase_nstr_pld_pile_crash.dat
Quad concrete cracked a1_introduction_example.dat
Bric tunneling ase14_tunnel_3d.dat
SYST PROB TH2: Input file
Beam overturning ase11_girder_overturning.dat
Beam column cracked aseaqb_1_column_cracked.dat
SYST PROB TH3: Input file
Overview examples geo-nonl ase_geo_nonl_overview.dat
Suspension bridge suspension_bridge_formfinding.dat
Cable sag ase5_cable_trestle.dat
Quad geometric nonlinear ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat
Quad shell buckling ase13_shell_buckling.dat
Quad web buckling webblecbuckling.dat
Quad membranes tennis.dat
Bric buckling bric_beul.dat

Summary of all example overviews:

Example overview see

Work laws -> Work law input
Copy loads -> LCC
Mass conversion -> MASS
Creep and shrinkage -> CREP
Nonlinear effects -> SYST PROB ...
Quad nonlinear -> NMAT YES
Membranes -> MEMB
Ultimate load iteration -> ULTI -> PUSH
Incremental launching -> LAUN
Contact Moving Springs -> MOVS
Dynamic time steps -> STEP
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-27

ASE | Input Description

Example overview see

Halfspace analysis -> HASE
Plot - diagrams -> PLOT

Overview workshop-tutorial YOUTUBE videos (workshops Poland/Oslo):

Subject Link
ASE dynamics https://youtu.be/w1W6xUmH4xk
ASE cables formfinding https://youtu.be/PmAeevUeJcU
ASE nonlinear shells https://youtu.be/QsGEUu1UGEU
ASE concrete BRIC volumes https://youtu.be/mn65lu_oEVQ
ASE membranes https://youtu.be/EvJuyYhPQKk
ASE T Beam in a Slab Nonlin https://youtu.be/5h637n5-SXk
Cable Net on free Surface https://youtu.be/AJpfZ995lcs
ASE stability https://youtu.be/Ui9qVyoSYZs
CSM cantilever erection https://youtu.be/taaBfPlIRGA
CSM precamber optimization https://youtu.be/YxljlRZ2gME
Optimization Introduction https://youtu.be/vRyBkK6kvvo
CSM force optimization https://youtu.be/W2GqbTaRSsE
CSM deformation targets https://youtu.be/XGL4lFmF1is
CSM suspension bridge https://youtu.be/kPzlHHmn-mM
CSM incremental launching https://youtu.be/euuJqK8TqFk
CSM arch bridge erection https://youtu.be/hrsiy1-qp0s
CSM DESI Bridge Design https://youtu.be/zoCshbOx5qo
CSM DESI Result Checks https://youtu.be/in8OTk24f1U
CSM DESI Slab Bridge https://youtu.be/7FdNbAgwPrI
CSM DESI AASHTO Design https://youtu.be/lJxF50C7pN8
CSM DESI Interpretations https://youtu.be/L_W0PCD44UQ
CSM DESI Stage Design https://youtu.be/QOoLlR-TCj8
Quickly check beam stresses https://youtu.be/PKHGGFo6nPg
Tendon Optimization https://youtu.be/BqYh1ZzAjVw
quad tendon eigenvalues https://youtu.be/P3CO2oMjVds
BEMESS layer design 2018 https://youtu.be/i3dVC6tCSH8
BEMESS layer " deutsch https://youtu.be/okhQiEKGQWQ
ASE dynamics teddy https://youtu.be/WooZ4h7V7M4
SOFiSTiK T-beam philosophy https://youtu.be/GoT1f0aGdgs
Cracked Piers and Pylons https://youtu.be/XjYxMLsxl0M
Tbeam Slab Cracked https://youtu.be/5h637n5-SXk

3-28 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Subject Link
Teddy_Text_Editor https://youtu.be/doAP5gmv6Gw
Advanced Teddy https://youtu.be/-dmssd38WZI
Teddy 3 Arrays and more https://youtu.be/naWzZJYTCpI
Volume Meshing SOFIMSHA https://youtu.be/nTa5v_XnuQw
Durchstanzen an Wandecken https://youtu.be/id_CjBMU2OQ

An overview over all examples can be found in TEDDY menue file - examples in folder ASE-
english. Then look further e.g. to folder ’nonlinear_quad’. Or you go over the SOFiSTiK
installation folder to
c:/program...sofistik/...ANALYSIS/ase.dat/english/nonlinear_quad

Further input remarks:

The value of PLC defines a global primary load case. This is used subsequently as default
for the primary load case of all group inputs. Furthermore the displacements of the primary
load case are added then and only then to the displacements of the current load case, if the
PLC has been defined in the SYST input. In the case of geometrical non-linear analysis the
stiffness is calculated for the deformed structure.

To use the geometric stiffness of a primary load case in a linear analysis please refer to SFIX.

A predeformation with PLC and FACV effects the internal forces moments only for PROB
TH3. On LINE or NONL the deformations of the PLC do not affect the forces, see Chapter
2: Non-linear Analyses and Chapter 5: example Buckling Mode Shapes in Supercritical Re-
gion. The application of a non-stressed predeformation is explained in the school example
ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat.

The stresses of the primary load case are used with GRP FACL=1. If the loads of the pri-
mary load case are applied simultaneously, then the system is in equilibrium and no additional
displacements arise (if no changes are made in the system).

With GRP FACL=0 the deformation of a load case can be defined here as non-stressed scaled
predeformation (see Chapter 5: example Buckling Mode Shapes in Supercritical Region).

If a primary load case with TH3 is defined for an eigenvalue determination, one obtains the
eigenfrequencies of the system under the stresses of the primary load case (accompanying
eigenvalue analysis).

The inputs ITER to FMIN are evaluated only for non-linear analysis.

Explanations to the non-linear iteration method:

Residual forces

New displacements and thus stresses are determined after every iteration
step. It is checked, whether plasticising, cracks or any other non-linear effects
have occurred at any elements. The plasticized elements generate different
nodal loads compared to those of the linear analysis. These nodal loads
which were generated by the elements are not anymore in equilibrium with

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-29

ASE | Input Description

the external nodal loads (after the first iteration step). The remaining residual
forces are applied as additional loading during the next iteration step. Ad-
ditional deformations and a new stress state which in general is closer to
equilibrium result. The maximum residual force is printed for every iteration
and has the dimension kN or kNm.

Graphical control of the residual forces

If an iteration ends with residual forces, a picture of the residual forces can be
requested in the program WINGRAF with residual forces or support forces.
Since unbalanced residual forces are stored as supported reactions, the
problem zone can be localized with that. Here the real support areas should
not be printed. Often, it is advisable to fade out the real support areas with
BOX and to draw only the interior of the structure. It is often very useful to
also check the residual moments!

Tolerance limit of the iteration

The tolerance limit can be defined with the record SYST. Here the reference
value is the largest nodal value which is available in the system. E.g. for a
maximum nodal load of 200 kN the tolerance limit for the residual forces is =
200 ·0.001 = 0.2 kN (for TOL=0.001). In this case all loads of the system are
used including the inherent stress nodal loads of the elements.
The tolerance for non-linear analysis can be input also absolutely with SYST
PROB NONL TOL -value.
Example: With the input SYST PROB NONL TOL -0.5 the iteration is inter-
rupted, if the maximum residual force is smaller than the value 0.5 kN.
In addition the convergence of the energy is checked. The energy is propor-
tional to the product of load*displacement. As the load is constant, the value
represents the global displacement. We print the ration of the energy of the
actual iteration to the energy of the first (linear) iteration. In case this value
still increases this is a sign for still increasing deformations. Then ASE does
not stop the iteration in case of fulfilled residual tolerance until also the en-
ergy norm is sufficiently convergent. In case this energy value converges and
does not increase any more, the displacements came to a standstill. Then
the analysis can often also be accepted although the residual cobnvergencs
is not yet sufficient.
Often you want to have more iterations but a not so strong linit at the end.
This usually results in higher plastic deformations and can be done e.g. with
SYST... ITER 200 TOL -0.1 TOL4 -2.0 TOL8 -6.0.

Iteration method

The default method for problems according to the second-order theory is the
Linesearch method with the update of the tangential stiffness (see record
CTRL). The load increment is reduced here internally according to the avail-
able residual forces. If an iteration step proceeds into the right direction,
i.e. in the direction of an energy minimum, then a new tangential stiffness
which enhances the further iteration’s behaviour is generated, if necessary.
Cracked elements are considered here also with a reduced stiffness. The

3-30 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Crisfield method is the default (CTRL ITER 0) for non-linear calculations ac-
cording to the first-order theory. For convergence problems the user should
attempt also the in each case other method (CTRL ITER 0 or CTRL ITER 3).

Variation of iteration factors

For convergence difficulties an improvement of the convergence behaviour

can be achieved often via reduction of the maximum f value, e.g. FMAX 1.5.
If the system still not converges, FMAX can be reduced until 0.7. However,
many iteration steps are needed then.
The Crisfield method which is implemented for the improvement of the con-
vergence modifies the displacement increments of the current and of the
last iteration step with the two factors f and e. f values which become alter-
nately larger and smaller than 1.0 are an indication of serious problems. The
method can be influenced in such cases by specifying maximum and mini-
mum values of factors. A negative value for ITER switches off this method
completely. By contrast, it may occur for tensile failure of stiff elements that
the residual forces change very slowly. Here it is useful to select a large val-
ues for f (e.g. FMAX = 999.). Generally applicable recommendations can not
be given here. EMAX should usually not be changed. First try FMAX 1.5,
then FMAX 0.8, then CTRL ITER 0 or CTRL ITER 3 V2 1.
The value FMAX is increasingly limited during the iteration process. Thereby
the convergence is improved for many iterations.

Failed foundation and tensile springs

For analyses without consideration of tensile support reactions (non-linear foundation or
springs) the basic foundation values should not be defined too large, because the program
reduces gradually these values until the foundation fails. For too large initial values for the
foundation the iteration converges extremely slowly.

Imperfection
The imperfection can be scaled automatically with the item VMAX. The inputs -1, -2, -3 for
SYST ... FACV control then the direction of the scaling, if desired.

SYST PLC 101 FACV - VMAX 0.05 defines the imperfection of the primary load case 101 with
a three-dimensional deformation of 5 cm.

SYST PLC 101 FACV -1 VMAX 0.5 defines the primary load case 101 with a maximum imper-
fection u-X of |5 cm|. All other deformations are scaled with the same factor.

SYST PLC 101 FACV -1 VMAX -0.05 as before, however, the imperfection figure is defined
with a negative sign.

Failure Mode Shapes

With a special control it is possible to get a more precise iteration process for the failure mode
shapes in ASE. An analysis according to the second-order and third-order theory does not
converge in many cases and it is unknown which failure mechanism will occur. At first a smaller
stable load step should be calculated in advance. Then the following input should be startet:

PROG ASE
HEAD delivers the failure in the iterations load cases 9001-9009..

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-31

ASE | Input Description

! Method:
! - new total stiffness after every step,
! - then continue without manipulation ITER -30
CTRL ITER 3 V2 1 ! new total stiffness after every step
SYST PROB TH3 ITER -30 PLC 15 ! !!minus!! -30
LC 201 FACT ... ! Factor, that will cause failure

Using TH3 you should always calculate dynamic and buckling eigen mode shapes on
the last stable load case to give an information about failure problems. See example
ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat

Geometry-Update
With SYST STOR the PLC deformed mesh can be stored with the updated nodal coordinates.

SYST STOR=YES: The new local coordinate systems of the QUAD elements are twisted by
the rotations of the load case PLC. They, however, keep the direction defined in the input.
Beam lengths are not updated for loading.

SYST STOR=NEW: The local coordinate systems of the QUAD elements are defined again.
A direction vector or direction point to define the local x axis e.g. from a sysem input in SOFI-
PLUS is taken into account. Beam lengths are updated for loading (it may be necessary to
run SOFILOAD LC TYPE REST). Also cable system length are set new, important e.g. in
formfindung see example csm28_suspension_bridge_real.dat

SYST STOR=XX,YY,ZZ and NEGX,NEGY,NEGZ: The direction of the local x axis is preset
for the new installation of the coordinate system of the elements, cf. program SOFIMSHA/-
SOFIMSHC. Beam lengths are updated for loading.

SYST STOR=ACAD: creates .dxf files with lines of the deformed mesh, further two .txt text
files with the lines for other data conversion.

SYST STOR=CUTT: after membrane cutting pattern: cutting areas and 3D geodetic lines as
.dxf file for Autocad, see example textile1_tennishall.dat

STOR=NEW to STOR=NEGZ acts only to QUAD elements. The local coordinate systems of
beams are twisted generally with the PLC displacements.

Caution:
All results of the nodal displacements are extinguished during the geometry update. Therefore
the data base must be saved absolutely before! With the input STOR=NEW to STOR=NEGZ
all other results are extinguished too, because the local directions are twisted. With the input
STOR=YES it is possible to use the old stresses via the record GRP, if no beam elements
are available. It may be necessary to update existing loads using SOFILOAD LC TYPE REST,
especially free loads POIN.LINE,AREA.

With SYST STOR UZ only the z displacements are corrected. For the x or y displacements are
also possible STOR UX and STOR UY.

3-32 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.5 STEP – Time Step Method Dynamics

See also: SYST, GRP

STEP

Item Description Unit Default

N Number of time steps − !

DT Time step − !
INT Output all INT steps (not implemented) −/ LT 1
BET Parameter of the integration method − 0.40
DEL − 0.55
THE (alpha method with THE input) − 1.
LCST Storage load case number −/ LT -
CONT = append on PLC sequence
SELE Selection of results to be stored − -
LCSM Storage number of min.-max values of all time steps − -
If LCSM is a base number (full hundred number), the
forces are stored including the corresponding forces
(LCSM 9900), otherwise only the extreme values
mixed in one loadcase (LCSM 9901)
DIV time step division − 0
ALF old input - please use BET as first parameter −

An overview to the possibilities of the dynamic time step analysis with remarks and examples
can be found in a1_dynamic_overview.dat

See also our YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=w1W6xUmH4xk

Examples to STEP Input file

Introduction a1_a1_dynamic_overview.dat
BEAM Ship impact plastic ase_nstr_pld_pile_crash.dat
Quad swinging cracked step_nonl_concrete_girder.dat
Glass window impact TH3 pendulum_impact_test.dat
SEIL Impact cable_dynamics.dat
Intelligent load step_intelligent_load.dat
Bettung abhebend step_intelligent_load_nonl.dat
Contact car collision movs_car_collision.dat
Beulen dyn. relaxation dynamic_relaxation_buckling.dat
Membran dyn. relaxation dynamic_relaxation_air_cushion.dat
→ Example overviews → Summary of example overviews

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-33

ASE | Input Description

The analysis of a time step of duration N·DT with direct (Newmark-Wilson) integration is re-
quested with STEP. The defaults for BET, DEL, THE correspond to a Newmark method with
numerical damping of higher frequencies for nonlinear analysis.

Following input is possible:

BET 0.25 0.50 1.00 $ Original Newmark without numerical damping

(BET 1/6 1/2 1.40) $ Original Wilson with large damping in higher modes, not
recommended in ASE
BET 0.4 0.55 1.00 $ good numerical damping of high frequencies
THE 0.70 $ alpha method acc. Hilber-Hughes-Taylor with THE= 1-
|alpha|(without BET+DEL input ! ) e.g. alpha -0.3 -> STEP
50 dt 0.05 THE 0.7

For nonlinear dynamics we recommend: THE 0.70 or BET 0.4 0.55 1.00

Damping parameters are to be input with record GRP.

Loadfunctions:
In ASE usually nonlinear dynamic is calculated. Therefore the complete stress state including
dead load must be genereated. To the permanent part (dead load) the variable part of the
loading (earthquake, impuls, initial velocity) must be added. It is best to combine the loading
directly in ASE, e.g.:
SYST PLC 1 $ static state
STEP N 100 DT 0.01 LCST 1001
LC 2 DLZ 1

LCC 801 $ permanente additional dead load without load function

LCC 901 $ variable load with load function from SOFILOAD

see step_sofiload_ase.dat

When the variable load starts, the static state already exists. If you first analyze the steady
state in a separate loadcase without time dynamic (e.g. loadcase 1) you can then continue
with the time dynamic analysis using the steady state as a primary loadcase - see SYST PLC
1 above. If you would activate the dead load in the time step analysis for the first time, the
system would accelerate from the unstressed start state and then swing arround the steady
state. This would be the case if you would suddenly remove the formwork from a concrete
girder, see step_nonl_concrete_girder.dat Saving of the results

In order to avoid large databases for the time step method the calculation can occur only with
two load cases which vary in each case. This works automatically using STEP N>1 and LCST.
The results which are important for the user can then be stored in separate storage load cases
with STEP LCST ... SELE ... (bit pattern). For N>1 LFST is increased in each step (see
example a2_introduction_earthquake.dat). With STEP 0 LCST ... this feature can also be
used for normal loadcases. Following inputs are possible:

STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +1 = displacements

STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +2 = support reactions

3-34 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +4 = velocities

STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +8 = accelerations
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +16 = beam internal forces and moments
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +32 = nonlinear beam results
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +64 = spring results
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +128 = truss+cable+boundary results
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +256 = QUAD results
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +512 = QUAD results in nodes
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +1024 = non-linear QUAD results
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +2048 = foundation results
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +4096 = BRIC results
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +8192 = BRIC results in nodes
STEP 1 LCST ... SELE +16384 = loads

default: all - example a2_introduction_earthquake.dat

With STEP...DIV a time step division can be controlled, if the nonlinear Iteration does not
achieve a necessary equilibrium:

DIV=0 - no time step division

DIV=1-9 divide time step max. DIV times, create internal time step division but
loadcase output for the requested time steps
DIV=11-19 adapt time step but store each time step. The resulting loadcase se-
qence then has variable delta-t.

Feature not active now - reserved for new time function input LCC...FUNC
Default DIV=0 : proposal for best input: DIV=-2
For negative DIV, the analysis continues in the shortest time step division also if no sufficient
equilibrium is reached. For DIV>0 the progranm stops.
At the end of the ASE run, a summary of the calculated time steps is printed.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-35

ASE | Input Description

3.6 HIST – Storage STEP-LCST

See also: STEP, GRP

HIST

Item Description Unit Default

TYPE Elementtype LT -

NODE BOUN TRUS CABL SPRI QUAD BRIC TEND
(BEAM is not implemented)

FROM Elementnumber − -
TO
INC

Selection of elements to be stored via STEP-LCST:

With HIST now nodes and elements can be selected for storage STEP-LCST-SELE to keep
the database small:
If no HIST command is defined for a certain elementtype, all elemente of this type are stored.
For example:

STEP ... LCST 1001 SELE 1+2+4+8+16+256+1024

HIST NODE from 701 to 750
HIST QUAD 318,319

stores nodal results for nodes 701-750, all beam results and und Quad results for elements
318+319.

3-36 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.7 ULTI – Limit Load Iteration

See also: CTRL, SYST, GRP, PLOT

ULTI

Item Description Unit Default

STEP Number of limit load iterations − 5

FAK1 Start factor of 1st load case − 1
(overwrites the factor in record LC - FACT!)
FAKE End factor or accuracy (-0.005 = 0.5%) − -0.005
DFAK First step of the load factor − 1
PRO Progression of the load factor − 2
DL The factor acts on the dead weight too LT YES
(only if a dead weight has been activated with GRP -
FACD or LC - DLZ)
NO Dead weight retains the initially input factor
PRIM Automatic introduction of a primary load case LT YES
NO A new load step is not added automatically
to the latest LC
DMIN Minimum step width of the load factor − -0.001
negative: as a factor on the actual load factor
SLOW Go on slowly: 0=step width division, 2=increase − 2
slower, 4=increase very slow (after first divergency)

EPSC Strain limit concrete (nonlinear quad and beam ele- o/ oo -3.5
ments)
EPSS Strain limit steel (nonlinear quad and beam elements) o/ oo 25.0

The limit load iteration begins with the factor given for FAK1. Any factor which was input in the
record LC FACT is not considered in this case and it is ineffective. If the first calculation ends
with a convergent iteration (notice the iteration parameters ITER and TOL in the SYST record),
a new load case is generated with a load case number increased by 1 and the load factor is
increased by DFAK.

Examples to ULTI:

Ultimate load iteration Input file

Stability quad column ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat
Slab buckling ase12_buckling_slab.dat
Shell buckling ase13_shell_buckling.dat
Concrete girder ULTI nonlinear_quad_concrete_beam.dat
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-37

ASE | Input Description

Ultimate load iteration Input file

Push Over Beam+Quad push_over_quad_beam_frame.dat
Push Over Quad Frame push_over_quad_deformation_controlled.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

If a primary load case has been defined in SYST PLC or GRP PLC the first calculation makes
already use of this given primary load case.

If a load should not be increased during the limit load iteration, this can be requested via the
function ’Copy Loads’ with ULTI=NO in the record LCC.

With PRIM YES the new load case makes use of the stable first load case. With PRIM NO the
analysis starts as in the first load case (PLC according to SYST PLC or GRP PLC).

If the second load case ends with convergence too, the last step of the load factor (DFAK) is
multiplied by the progression PRO and used as new step. The third load case obtains then the
load factor FAK1 + DFAK + DFAK·PRO and so on.

The default values FAK1=1, DFAK=1 and PRO=2 result in the following load steps:

Load case 1 Factor 1.00

Load case 2 Factor 2.00
Load case 3 Factor 4.00
Load case 4 Factor 8.00
Load case 5 Factor 16.00

Load deformation curves can be calculated with FAK1=1, DFAK=1 and PRO=1 (can be repre-
sented graphically, see example ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat):

Load case 1 Factor 1.00

Load case 2 Factor 2.00
Load case 3 Factor 3.00
Load case 4 Factor 4.00
Load case 5 Factor 5.00

If an iteration is divergent, i.e. equilibrium could not be reached, the last load step increment
is halved. With the default DMIN -0.001 the load step increment will not be taken smaller
than 0.001 times the actual load factor. But this only occurs if also FACE is reduced because
otherwise the iteration will stop due to FACE. With higher DMIN local stability problems may be
eliminated. The user has to convince himself of the accuracy of the final solution because also
non-convergent results may be saved! If strain or stress limits are reached, a negative DMIN
will not be taken into account any longer.

The limit load iteration ends, if FAKE or the maximum number STEP are reached. For negative
FAKE also if the accuracy is reached. Input -0.02 = 2% (when the two last factors differ less
than 2%).

3-38 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

On SLOW, ASE always checks the load deformation curve. If this curve gets flat, the load will
be increased slower after the first divergency.

A load step is also set to not convergent if a strain or utilisation reaches a limit. With ULTI
EPSC and EPSS strain limits for nonlinear quad elements can be set (default -3.5 per mille
for concrete, 25 per mille for steel). With GRP2 ULUS you can also define a maximum stress
utilisation. For nonlinear beams NSTR CHKC can be used.

If a new stable primary load case is used, the program generates always the new tangential
geometry stiffness matrix.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-39

ASE | Input Description

3.8 PUSH – Push over analysis

See also: CTRL, SYST, GRP, ULTI

PUSH

Item Description Unit Default

N Number of push steps − 1

FDL Factor Delta L : length of the first displacement incre- − 0.2
ment
PRIM YES/NO same as in ULTI LT JA
CONT Continue : auf welchen Lastfall aufzusetzen ist: −/ LT ULTI
TRAG auf letzte Traglastiteration aufsetzen
PUSH an letzte Push Iteration anschliessen
... auf Lastfallnummer ... aufsetzenLoadcase
number

Attention: it is not enshured that the loadcases created with PUSH can really carry the load-
factor. A convergence of the residual force is not demanded. Only in case the residual force in
the PUSH iteration converges to 0 a real equilibrium is reached.

The advantage is that with PUSH ASE tries to iterate into the failure. So PUSH can deliver
useful information about the failure mechanism.

Similar to an arch length method PUSH increases the displacement by a given factor. Depend-
ing on the system answer the loadfactor is adapted and can also decrease. Usually it is not
possible to exactly follow a decending path of the load displacement curve but especially in
case of a plateau PUSH can iterate very good into higher displacements and can overcome
minor local stability problems. As PUSH requires a primary loadcase, beams with NSTR S* or
K* are not allowed for PUSHO.

Ahead of a PUSH analysis usually an ULTI analysis is performed. Using PUSH CONT ULTI,
ASE continues on the last ULTI step and increases the deformation. For this, FDL defines
the length of the deformation of the first PUSH step. With FDL 0.3 ASE tries to increase the
deformation of the first ULTI step by 30%. In fig. 3.11 the deformation of the last ULTI step is
plotted in green with length 1.0. With PUSH 4 FDL 0.3 four steps with deformation step length
0.3 follow in red. Finally with PUSH 4 FDL 0.4 CONT PUSH four further steps are added in
yellow. Of course 0.4 now refers to a higher starting length.

3-40 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

0.3

1.0 1.0

Figure 3.11: left first ULTI run, right load displacement curve after two PUSH sequences

DL: this information is taken from the primary loadcase PUSH CONT. In case the dead load
factor there is equal the load factor LC FACT, DL YES is set - refer to ULTI. Otherwise DL NO
is set and dead load is not increased.

Examples to PUSH:

Push over analysis Input file

QUAD single span girder a1_introduction_example.dat
Push Over Quad Frame push_over_quad_deformation_controlled.dat
Push Over Beam+Quad push_over_quad_beam_frame.dat
Wall disk concrete_wall.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

PUSH also ignores an exceedance of strain limits or utilisations. Please always check the final
table ’Statistic nonlinear effects’.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-41

ASE | Input Description

3.9 PLOT – Plot of a Limit Load Iteration

See also: ULTI

PLOT

Item Description Unit Default

LC First load case number − !

TO Last load case number − -
NNO Node number − -
DIRE Direction − -
TYPE Plot type LT4 *
FACT load-displacement plot
FACR ” but factor to the right
TIME displacement plot on time axis
LCNO displacement plot on load case number
EX sig-eps hysterese plot
→ase.dat\dynamics\
step_nonl_concrete_girder.dat
EX sig-eps Hysterese Plot
→ase.dat\dynamics\
step_nonl_betonbalken.dat
NO Element number − -
for spring, beam and quad results
XI QUAD-layer depth − -
(nur bei RICH= SX, SY, SXY,
TAUX, TAUY, SS1 oder SS2)
NULL connection to the (0,0) nullpoint − 1
0=no, 1=yes

A plot of a limit load iteration can be generated with an input for PLOT. If no input for TO is
done, than the last load case number of a sequence is used automatically. Gaps between LC
and TO are allowed (CSM TO 4999). Without input for NNO the node number with the largest
displacement is selected then automatically and without input for DIRE the direction with the
largest displacement.

Following directions can be input for DIRE:

UX,UY,UZ (or X,Y,Z) displacement

PHIX,PHIY,PHIZ rotation

VX,VY,VZ,VR nodal velocity VR=vector

3-42 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

VPHX,VPHY,VPHZ rotation

AX,AY,AZ,AR nodal acceleration AR=vector

APHX,APHY,APHZ rotation

PX,PY,PZ support reaction

MX,MY,MZ support moment

N,M,PT,V spring normal force, moment, PT, displacement for

element NO
NV springforce-springdisplacement diagram

BN,BVY,BVZ,BMT,BMY,BMZ Beam N,VY,VZ,MT,MY,MZ for beam NO

enter xi=0 for beam x=0 or xi=999 for end of beam

CN Cable N for cable NO

TN Truss N for truss element NO

SX,SY,SXY,TAUX,TAUY QUAD layer stress for element NO

SS1,SS2 QUAD layer reinforcement stress

The definition for PLOT can be done also in a separate ASE input, e.g.

PROG ASE
HEAD
PLOT 101 NNO 200 DIRE Y
END

Examples to PLOT:

Task Input file

Load deformation curve ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat
Quad layer stress step_nonl_concrete_girder.dat
Spring force hysterese spring_law_3_pkin_curve.dat
Plots with prog results: ase1_overview.dat
Beam-MY curve ase_nstr_pld_pile_crash.dat
Cross section stresses aseaqb_1_column_cracked.dat
” in bridge design csm31_design.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-43

ASE | Input Description

3.10 CREP – Creep and Shrinkage

See also: CTRL, SYST, GRP

CREP

Item Description Unit Default

NCRE Number of creep steps (1-99) − 5

RO Relaxation coefficient according to Trost − 0
T Effective duration of period dys 0.0
(only for CSM creep control)
BEAM Control for take-over of the creep calculation for bend- − ASE
ing beams via creep curvatures from the program
AQB or for the calculation in ASE
AQB Take over from AQB
ASE Calculation in ASE
RCRE partial creep factors LT -
CSM taken from CSM

Additional inputs are necessary in the record GRP ... PHI EPS RELZ PHIF:

PHI Total creep factor of NCRE creep steps

but for RCRE CSM the real creep construction stage load part from
CSM is used
EPS Total shrinkage coefficient of NCRE creep steps (negative)
RELZ Relaxation of the prestressing steel (is applied only in the first creep
step fully)
PHIF Total creep step for springs, foundation, FLEX,HASE
but for RCRE CSM the real creep construction stage load part from
CSM is used
To define the creep curves for such elements, best in-
put a dummy concrete element in group 0, see example
hase3_hase3_variable_surface_level.dat

Creep and shrinkage with construction stages or in bridge design should be done with module
CSM (see examples below). Using pure ASE there are two different creep calculations:

1st Plate calculation according to cracked condition in one step

For plates in cracked condition a simplified consideration of creep and shrinkage effects was
implemented in a step. With an input of CREP 1 and GRP PHI EPS creep and shrinkage are
calculated as follows in a load case step without input of a primary load case:

• The elastic modulus of concrete is reduced to E=E0/(1+PHI) or the stress from the worklay
is reduced by 1/(1+PHI).
• The concrete is given a pre-strain of EPS.

3-44 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Because the shrinkage shortening acts only on the compression side at a cracked cross sec-
tion, shrinkage causes an enlargement of the bending also at plates. At the cracked tensile
side shrinkage acts only on the cracked width. The creep and shrinkage values affect all ele-
ments with material concrete, PHIF affects springs, edges and QUAD foundations, also with a
reduction of the stiffness of 1/(1+PHIF). But not for halfspace. PHIF for halfspace only works
via primary load case PLC.

2nd More complex calculation with use of a primary load case (is used by CSM)

At that the total creep is dismantled in NCRE creep intervals which are calculated in NCRE load
cases. The load cases generated automatically by the first LC load case number ascendingly.

The stresses of a primary load case which are accepted as constant during a creep step (or
of the last creep step) are converted into strains. These strains are multiplied by the (with the
modified relaxation coefficient RO) partial creep coefficient DPHI and used as a load for alle
concrete elements . Middle stresses which generates creep are not determined.

Abrupt constraint is applied for creep of the stresses from PLC (reduction of a constraint inter-
nal force):

ZK = Z0 ( 1 - dϕ/(1 + RO·dϕ)) see STAR2 manual

ZKF = Z∞( 1 - dϕf/(1 + RO·dϕ)) (springs + foundation)

For shrinkage a gradual constraint is assumed:

ZS = Z∞ ( 1 /(1 + RO·dϕ)) (shrinkage)

with dϕ=PHI/NCRE

Computation:

The program uses the stresses of the primary load case as stresses producing creep. It applies
the primary load case in an internal way with FACL=ZK for the corresponding elements. For
tendons the PLC is scheduled only in the first creep step with the factor (1-relz), in all further
creep steps with the factor 1.0.

At shrinkage the partial shrinkage coefficient which was reduced according to Trost is used:
load-strain = dε·ZKF = ε·ZKF/NCRE

Actually the program allows only creep values with dphi < 0.4 in the case of calculations with
primary load case. If the stresses producing creep are hardly reduced by creep and shrinkage,
RO has to be defined in a correspondingly small way or more creep steps have to be input. For
a prestress from the program TENDON only RO=0 is possible generally in order to avoid an
unintentional reduction of the creep effect for the statically determinate part of the prestress -
possible increase of NCRE. Values in the region of 0.8 are reasonable for creep of a constraint
condition, for example from construction stage. For values which are smaller than dϕ=0.2 the
importance of RO comes in the background.

Creep and shrinkage are effective for all concrete elements of type BEAM, TRUS, CABL, QUAD
+ BRIC, see overview in the CSM manual. PHIF acts on spring and boundary elements and
on pile- and quad bedding. Thereby the QUAD foundation can get another creep coefficient
(settlement) independently of the QUAD element. RELZ acts only on tendons of the plate
prestress.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-45

ASE | Input Description

With CREP BEAM it can be controlled, whether the creep calculation for bending beams via
creep curvatures is taken over from AQB (CREP BEAM=AQB) or whether it should be de-
termined in ASE (CREP BEAM=ASE = default). Caution: Prestressed beams have to be
calculated with AQB! Please refer to program CSM.

The program extension ASE1 is necessary for creep calculations.

Examples to CREP Input file

Technique by hand ase7_creep_two_span_girder.dat
Creep on cracked quad a1_introduction_example.dat
Long term slab deflection a2_nonlinear_slab.dat
Intruduction CSM csm1_4span_centering.dat
Twospan creep example csm2_simplecreep.dat
Prestressed bridge csm31_design.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

3-46 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.11 GRP – Group Selection Elements

See also: SYST, LC, GRP2

GRP

Item Description Unit Default

NO Group number − -
CSM group setting as used in CSM,
e.g. GRP ’CSM’ CS 40
default GRP - = all groups
(please use GRP - instead of old GRP all)
VAL Selection LT FULL
OFF the group is not used
YES group is used but not printed
FULL group is used and printed (ECHO)
LIN YES, but material linear
LINE FULL, but material linear (TH2, TH3 not af-
fected)
FACS Factor for group stiffness / see also GRP2 STEA- − -
QUEA
PLC Number of the primary load case − *
Default as in SYST
GAM Parameter of an additional kN/ m3 0
H analytical primary state m 0
K − 1
kN/ m2
 
SIGN σ -z = GAM · (Z-H) + SIGN 1092 0
kN/ m2
 
SIGH σ -x = σ -y = K · σ -z + SIGH 1092 0
FACL Factor for the stresses from primary state PLC − 1
Loads must always be applied manually with LCC
FACD Factor of dead weight in defined dead weight direction − 0
(SYST GDIR from SOFIMSHA, SOFIMSHC)
HW Ordinate of the ground water level [m] 1091 ± 99999.
GAMA Weight under water kN/m3 γ-10
RADA Raleigh damping factor for mass proportional damp- 1/ sec 0.
ing
RADB Raleigh damping factor for stiffness proportional sec 0.
damping
CS Construction stage number for sections + tendons −/ LT -
BOND : bonded if possible (same as CS 9998)
NONE : without tendon area - unbonded (as CS 9999)
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-47

ASE | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

PREX Element prestress in local x direction kN, m 0

PREY QUAD prestress in local y direction kN, m 0
PHI Creep coefficient (see record CREP) − 0
EPS Shrinkage coefficient − 0
RELZ Relaxation of prestressing steel − 0
AUTO automatic determination
input 0.03 means loss of 3%
PHIF Creep coefficient for springs, foundation, FLEX, − PHI
HASE
on CREP-RCRE-CSM PHIF is not used (see CREP)
PHIS Creep coefficient for elements which do not consist of − 0
concrete (composite structures)
T1 Stiffness development of elements with concrete ac- dys -
cording to the modified concrete age T1
HING Beam pin-joint temporarily for precast bridges − ACTI
ACTI pin-joint
FIX fixed connection
example: Single Span Girder with Auxiliary Support
FACB Factor for bedding of piles and QUAD bedding − FACS
CSDL Dead load of a later construction stage − -
MNO Material number of PHI and EPS if in a group different − -
materials occur → CSM

The record GRP defines the participating elements as well as the stress state which is available
at the beginning of the analysis. At first the defaults for all groups are defined with GRP ALL or
GRP - , e.g. GRP -FULL. The following input for a group overwrites then this default, e.g. GRP
5 NO.

A stiffness reduction may be defined with FACS for 2nd /3rd order theory (1/γm -multiple).

The loading components from the stresses of the primary state are multiplied by FACL to the
load case which is to be calculated. FACD defines a dead weight loading with the values
GAM/GAMA of the material record in dead weight direction. This loading is usually in equilib-
rium with the primary state. The loads from FACL and FACD act in all load cases of the input
block.

If the old loads of the primary load case ( PLC) are applied simultaneously to a system with
the loads from the primary stresses with FACL=1, these both loading cancel themselves. New
deformations do not result. Therefore the loads from the primary stresses oppose the old
loads.

The analysis of the tendons is controlled by CS similar to the program AQBS. Depending on the
value of CS the empty duct or the duct with the tendon or of the grouted duct are used. If CS is

3-48 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

not input, the default CS=BOND 998 is set, then tendons with ICS2<=998 are used bonded and
tendons with ICS2=999 are used unbonded (in case CS-numbers>1000 are used in TENDON,
the default is set toBOND with value 9998). More explanations see prestressed_slab.dat

The values GAM-SIGH, FACT, HW and GAMA are only applicable to volume elements (BRIC),
i.e. only then an analytical primary stress state is reasonable. By contrast, all control parame-
ters of a primary state from a previous analysis have effect to all elements.

The primary state is necessary for non-linear analysis and in addition it facilitates the determi-
nation of loads due to changes of the static system. The analytical component is defined with
the load SIGN which is effective in a height H and an increase GAM. The horizontal component
is obtained by means of the lateral pressure coefficient and the vertical stress. The item GAM
has usually the same values as the items GAM/GAMA of the material record, however, it is
independent of them.

Figure 3.12: Analytical stress states (Talpa y goes down)

GRP 1 GAM GAM1 H 0 SIGN SIGN1 $ for H1 = 0.0 (ASE z goes down)
GRP 2 GAM GAM2 H H2 SIGN SIGN1+Gam1*(H2-H1)

The item HW specifies the phreatic level in the corresponding group. Continuum elements
(BRIC) located below HW are analysed under buoyancy. The default setting fo HW is "infinitely
deep". Depending on the direction of gravity the phreatic level is set to ± 99999m, in this case.

Prestress of elements via record GRP: GRP - PREX PREY

With GRP ... PREX PREY a real prestress can be defined in addition to TRUS-CABL-SPRI
also for QUAD and BEAM elements. This acts, first of all, as a normal prestressed load.
However, it is considered also with the factor CTRL PRES for the initial stiffness. In this way
membrane and cable structures can be calculated more simply according to the third-order
theory. A membrane high point should be input via the record HIGH.

With springs you can use GRP ... PREX to simulate a support lifting. E.g. you used a coupling
spring in group 7 with stiffness 1.E6, you can achieve a support lifting by 1 cm with GRP 7
PREX -1.E4.

The value from GRP ... PREX PREY is interpreted in kN/m for QUAD, and in kN for BEAM,
TRUS, CABL and SPRI. For cables with the additional input PREY ’hori’ a horizontal compo-
nent can be defined. The real cable prestress is then applied higher depending on the gradient
of the cable.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-49

ASE | Input Description

The GRP prestress acts also for linear calculation. A stabilization for the error estimate can be
achieved in this way at displaced systems. In addition the prestress is considered also for an
eigenvalue determination!

Differences of the input of a truss or cable prestress in the program SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC

for the GRP prestress:

- SOFIMSHA-PRE acts in all load cases as long as a primary load case (PLC) is not used.
- GRP-PREX acts only in ASE calculations in which it is input, however, in the record GRP
in addition to a prestress of a primary load case.

Creep for composite systems concrete + steel

A separate item PHIS can be input in the record GRP for elements which do not consist of
concrete. Elements of concrete are processed with GRP ... PHI,EPS. Springs, boundary ele-
ments and elastic foundations are processed with GRP ... PHIF without shrinkage. Elements
whose cross section material is not concrete are processed with GRP ... PHIS. Shrinkage of
these elements is considered with the value EPS·PHIS/PHI.

For BEAM composite cross sections and BEAM prestressed concrete cross sections creep
and shrinkage have to be processed with the program AQB.

The prestressing steel relaxation of the QUAD tendons is determined automatically with the
input RELZ AUTO in combination with the time duration input T in record CREP. The material
values STEE ... REL1+REL2 from the program AQUA are used..

Stiffness development of elements with concrete

For input of the temperature adjusted concrete age T1 in GRP...T1, the development of stiff-
ness of concrete elements is taken into account. The program CSM automatically adjusts T1
in dependence on the given temperature. The development is plotted for the first concrete
material (for ECHO MAT FULL for all concrete materials and also for calculations with primary
load case).

Function for prefabricated bridges

Temporary BEAM pin-joints can be fixed with GRP HING FIX. Thus a construction stage can be
calculated with pin-joint and a final stage without pin-joint. The results can be superpositioned
and designed. All pin-joints are active with the default GRP HING ACTI.
Example see ase6_two_span_girder_construction_stages.dat

Later construction stages

With GRP CSDL the dead load of a later construction stage can be activated already for com-
posite beam cross sections with activated stiffness of the cross section construction stage CS
(green concrete dead load).
Example see csm3_composite_beam.dat

3-50 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.12 GRP2 – Expanded Group Selection

See also: GRP, TEMP

GRP2

Item Description Unit Default

NO Group number − -
STEA Formfinding cable-stayed bridges: − -
normal force stiffness component of beams
QUEA Orthotropic slabs: − -
normal force stiffness component of QUAD ele-
ments, see QU_M for moments
QUEX Orthotropic slabs: − -
reduction of the QUAD axial force stiffness only in
local x
QUEY same as QUEX but in y direction − -
ALP0 Lower threshold for stiffness development for BRIC − 0.001
elements HYDRA temperature field
ULUS Limitation of QUAD stress (utilisation) in ultimate limit − -
analysis
QEMX Reduction of the elastic modulus of QUAD elements − -
in local x direction (QEMY below BWES)
EXPO Exponent for the elastic modulus according to "Braun- − 1/2
schweiger Stoffmodell"
GEOM Group-wise control of the geometric stiffness from pri- − 2
mary load case for buckling eigenvalues
BWES β value in the formula according to Wesche − 0.55
ST_M Bending stiffness factor beam elements, acts on − -
MY,MZ,QY,QZ,MT, normal stiffness unchanged
STIT Torsional stiffness factor beams, acts on IT only − -
QU_M Bending stiffness factor quad-elements, acts on − -
mxx,myy,mxy,vy,vz, normal stiffness unchanged
QEMY same as QEMX but in y direction − -

The definition of the following GRP2 data in an ASE calculation is maintained in the database
and is used in following ASE calculations (without GRP2 input, e.g. for an eingenvalue SSD
task):

• QUEA , QUEX , QUEY , QEMX , QEMY , QU_M : data remain for following ASE
• all other GRP2 data do not remain for following ASE

A new GRP2 input in a further ASE calculation or a GRP2 input without parameters deletes all
old GRP2 definition in the database.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-51

ASE | Input Description

QUEA With QUEA the E·A part of the QUAD elements can be modified. Example see
steel_composite_orto.dat
QUEX,QUEY With QUEX it is possible to reduce the QUAD axial force stiffness only in local x
direction for orthotropic slabs.
QEMX,QEMY with QEMX the elastic modulus of QUAD elements can be modified in local x
direction, e.g. GRP2 - QEMX 0.001. Example see steel_composite_orto.dat
There using QUEA 0.001 and QEMX 0.001 in parallel, the bending stiffness in x is
reduced by 0.001, the normal stiffness in x by 0.000001! Because:
If you have a beam and a quad in parallel, usually the quad is excentric to the
beam and you must highly reduce the quad normal stiffness by 0.000001! The quad
bending itself is not so important and to achieve a slight mxy behavior it is best
to reduce the quad bending stiffness by only 0.001. Please notice that the EM in
QEMX means E-modulus and works on normal- and bending stiffness.
QU_M Bending stiffness factor beam elements, acts on MY,MZ,QY,QZ,MT, normal stiffness
unchanged
QUEA+QUEX+QUEY+QEMX+QEMY+QU_M Combined you get:
Modified membrane stiffness:
Snx-mod = Snx *FACS *QUEA *QUEX *QEMX (mit FACS from input GRP)
Sny-mod = Sny *FACS *QUEA *QUEY *QEMY
Snxy-mod= Snxy *FAKS *QUEA *min(QUEX,QUEY) *SQRT(QEMX)*SQRT(QEMY)
Modified bending stiffness:
Smx-mod = Smx *FACS *QEMX *QU_M
Smy-mod = Smy *FACS *QEMY *QU_M
Smxy-mod= Smxy *FAKS *SQRT(QEMX)*SQRT(QEMY) *QU_M (slab torsion)
Modified slab shear stiffness:
Sx-mod = Sx *FAKS *SQRT(QEMX) *QU_M
Sy-mod = Sy *FAKS *SQRT(QEMY) *QU_M

With ECHO MAT EXTR the 8*8 element material matrix can be printed.
STEA With STEA the normal force stiffness component of beams can be in-
creased. The bending stiffness remains unchangeable. Example see suspen-
sion_bridge_formfinding.dat
GEOM Group-wise control of the geometric stiffness from primary load case for buckling
eigenvalues
To avoid negative eigenvalues, now in each group the geometric stiffness from the
primary loadase can be switched variabel:
Input GRP2 GEOM:
0 don’t scale geometric stiffness in buckling eigenvalues
1 normal geometric stiffness in buckling eigenvalues
2 as 1, but don’t scale geometric stiffness for membrane elements
3 as 1, but don’t scale geom. stiffness for membranes and cables
-1 don’t use geometric stiffness at all (also in static analysis and natural
frequencies)
’don’t scale’ means, that the geometric stiffness is added to the linear stiffnesss

3-52 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

matrix, deleted in the total geometric stiffnesss matrix and thus is not scaled with
the buckling factor.
Default: GRP2 - GEOM 2
Please notice: there is another nice feature to get buckling eigenvalues e.g. for
specific groups, see figue at FIXT
ALP0 With ALP0 varying material stiffness due to different hydration degrees can be taken
into account in an stress analysis of a HYDRA temperature field. The lower thresh-
old for stiffness development can be input here (default 0.001).
With TEMP EMOD OFF this stiffness modification can be switched off. Example
see ripe_creep_comparision.dat
ULUS Limitation of QUAD stress in ultimate limit analysis
With GRP2 ULUS (ultimate limit iteration - capacity usage) the load will not be en-
larged, if the maximum van Mise stress in a layer element (non-linear concrete, steel
of FLAY-material) reaches the value ULUS*strength. For concrete, strength is fc in
AQUA, for steel fy. See also ULTI EPSC.
EXPO BRIC hydration:
The exponent for the BRIC hydration E-modulus can now be input for each group.
The default is the value of TEMP EXPO.
BWES β value value according to Wesche in the formula
−BWES
−28−BWES



ƒβ = e −·/ z· te
a·w/z = value can be defined in record TEMP EMOD
default: 0.55 (Technische Empfehlung Bautechnick BAW / Wesche)
te = effective concrete age resulting from the HYDRA analysis
Thus the elastic modulus that is used is determined as follows:
E = ƒβ 1/ 3 · E28

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-53

ASE | Input Description

3.13 Q8X8 – Quad 8x8 Stiffness Matrix

See also: GRP2

Q8X8

Item Description Unit Default

ROW Zeile der Eingabe 1:8 − -

MXX Componente row 1 kNm -
MYY Componente row 2 kNm -
MXY Componente row 3 kNm -
QX Componente row 4 kN/ m -
QY Componente row 5 kN/ m -
NXX Componente row 6 kN/ m -
NYY Componente row 7 kN/ m -
NXY Componente row 8 kN/ m -
FROM valid for all quads from group FROM − -
TO up to group TO − -

Example: timber_8x8_matrix.dat

The definition of the 8x8 quad stiffness is stored in the database and is valid for all following
ASE runs. So this input can also be done in an own ASE run in advance without any other
input, see the example. To check that the stiffness is used in every ASE, you will find a printout
of the 8X8 matrixes in the Report, also in ASE triggered by CSM.

In the first input line (without ROW) also a group list is allowed, e.g. Q8x8 FROM 2,5,14

With a pure input Q8x8 without further values the info in the database can be deleted.

Q8x8 is used in timber analysis. Stiffness values can be found e.g. on the internet page of
company www.klhdesigner.at

As material every material can be used, but if you use a FLAY layered material with the cor-
responding layer definition, ASE can also recalculate stresses from the forces (calculated with
the 8x8 matrix), see timber_8x8_matrix.dat .

3-54 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.14 ELEM – Single Element Settings

ELEM

Item Description Unit Default

ETYP Elementtype - possible input: LT BEAM

BEAM TRUS CABL SPRI QUAD BRIC
NO Elementnumber − !
FACS stifness factor - overwrites GPR-FAFC. − -
FACS=0 deactivates one single element (collaps
analysis).
FACL as GRP FACL − -
for element damage, both FACS and FACL
should be reduced!
FCTK Tension strength - ONLY for cracked concrete quads N/ mm2 -
(SYST NMAT YES) (has no effect, if stress strain law
is also defined in tension).
See example tunnel_shell.dat
PREX prestress as in command GRP kN -
(only for trus, cable and spring elements)
UX Expansion of a spring (only allowed for springs) [mm] 1003 -
e.g. for support lifting (local spring direction)

EPSC Concrete compression strain (compression as posi- kN -

tive input) for elimination of quads
(only on input without element number NO)
EPSS Reinforcement steel strain for elimination of concrete o/ oo -
quads o/oo (only on input without element number
NO)

Input for collaps analysis: there are two ways of usage:

1. With input of an element number NO:

In big sytems it is often necessary to check the behaviour under failure of one single element.
With ELEM ETYP NO FACS one single element can be switched off or weakened. Usually
also the element force of the PLC must be reduced → usually also FACL has to be reduced!

2. Without input of an element number NO: with EPSC,EPSS (and FACS)

in case high quad element strains occor in a time step analysis, the elements can be eliminated.
With input e.g. ELEM QUAD - FACS 0 EPSC 30 EPSS 120 quad elements with a concrete
compression strain > 30 o/oo or a steel strain > 120 o/oo will be eliminated for further time
steps or used with a FACS times stiffness.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-55

ASE | Input Description

Using STEP...LCST for every eliminated element a quad temperature load is stored under the
LCST loadcase number showing the reason in the load value -> WINGRAF loads:
load value 100 : element was already deactivated in last PLC -> WING last LC
load value 101 : concrete compression strain exceeded
load value 102 : steel strain exceeded
load value 103 : concrete compression and steel strain
load value 104 : defect element geometry detected (determinant <0)
example see collaps_element_deactivation.dat

3-56 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.15 LEN0 – Unstressed Length

LEN0

Item Description Unit Default

ETYP Element type − CABL

TRUS Truss elements
CABL Cable elements
NO Element number (GRP see below) − !
L0 Unstressed length [m] 1001 !
TYPE Input of system length LT TOTA
TOTA Input of total cable installation length
DELT Input of difference L0 to the system length
in the undeformed system
LCL0Input of difference L0 to unstressed length
of loadcase LC
LC Loadcase for TYPE-LCL0 − -
GRP instead of NO: all elements of group GRP − -

Example: cable_unstressed_length.dat

Input LEN0 only allowed for SYST PROB TH3/NONB and without CTRL CANT 3.

LEN0 CABL 501 L0 67.000 TYPE TOTA ! install cable with length 67.000m
LEN0 CABL 502 L0 -0.100 TYPE DELT ! 100 mm shorter than system length
LEN0 CABL GRP 50 L0 0 TYPE LCL0 LF 7 ! with unstressed length of LC 7

If a cable is activated in a CS for the first time and a LEN0 input is found for it, the cable is
installed stressfree with this length, independant of deformations in the primary loadcase PLC!
Internally it gets an additional prestress that shortens it so that the desired length appears.

Without LEN0 (normal behaviour) a cable is installed in that way that on the PLC deformations
it has force 0 (without prestress and load on internal cable sagging).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-57

ASE | Input Description

3.16 HIGH – Membrane High Points

See also: GRP

HIGH

Item Description Unit Default

XM Coordinates of the high point [m] 1001 *

YM [m] 1001 *
ZM (ZM is not used yet) [m] 1001 0
NX Normal vector of the high point axis − 0
NY Default: Z axis − 0
NZ − 1
PR1 Radial stress in 1 m distance to the high point or to kN/ m *
the direction XM, YM, ZM
PTPR Ratio of tangential to radial prestress − *
NOG Group for which this prestress is valid − -
Default: all groups

If genuine high points at membranes are available, an orthotropic prestress with a fixed ratio of
the tangential/radial prestress is wanted also mostly. A radial stress which increases itself to
the high point is necessary here. This axisymmetric high point-stress state is generated with
the record HIGH. Here PR1 defines the radial stress in 1 m distance to the high point. PTPR
defines the ratio of the tangential to the radial prestress.

Membranes should be generated with triangulas elements (SOFIPLUS export triangles).

Examples see Theoretical principles.

Example of a high point at X = 5.0 m, Y = 0.0 m:

HIGH 5[m] 0[m] PR1 20 PTPR 0.4

shows:

σ -R in 1m distance = 20.00 kN/m

corresponding-σ -T = 8.00 kN/m (0.4*20)

and from causes of the equilibrium for example in 10 m distance:

σ -R= PR1·1/r·eˆ (PTPR·ln(r))= 20·1/10·exp(0.4·ln(10))= 5.02 kN/m

corresponding-σ -T = 2.01 kN/m (0.4·5.02)

If the distance is larger than 1000 m, a constant prestress is assumed. The stress in direction
to the high point is then always PR1, the stress orthogonal to this direction is PTPR·PR1,
therefore without radial reduction as described above. The advantage is in the simple input of
skew prestress independently of the direction of the local element coordinate systems! The

3-58 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

stress in the QUAD elements results from the global directions!

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-59

ASE | Input Description

3.17 TBEX – T-beam-philosophy on excentric beam elements

TBEX

Item Description Unit Default

NOG Group number of beams −/ LT -

AUTO = all beams if possible
OFF = do not use T-beam-philosophy TBEX
Secondary groups allowed, see
t_beam_excentric_test.dat
NEFF non effective factor for bending MY. Default: use non- − -
effective width from the section (see AQUA NEFF)
AREA area of the upper concrete slab (change only in spe- [m2] 1012 -
cial cases)
EX_Q excentricity of the upper concrete slab (change only [m] 1001 -
in special cases)
F_IZ additional reduction of transverse IZ stiffness − 0.5
F_GZ additional factor on the shear stiffness GAZ − -
FIXE special case: FIXE=1 : beam sequence is restraint at − -
the ends, e.g. in an abutment wall

Bem Qd

Figure 3.13: Also refer to figure 2.11 in theoretic principles

With the input TBEX a group of beam elements can be advised to perform the t-beam-
philosophy also on excentric beams. Then the double concrete part in the beam and the quads
is substracted, the beam forces corrected and of course the dead load not applied twice. The

3-60 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

quad elements as well as the in situ concrete in the beam section can and should have a
normal dead load factor gamma in the material.

In version 2018 it was necessary to reduce the normal stiffness of the quads with GRP2 QUEA
if you used excentric beams in the t-beam-philosophy. With version 2020 the excentric TBEX
t-beam-philosophy also works with full isotropic quads. You may use GRP2 QUEA in addition
to TBEX to get the same behavior as in version 2018 but it is not necessary and not recom-
mended. In special cases you can reduce the E*A stiffness only for creep and shrinkage ->
see CSM manula TBEX.

Using TBEX you now get a quad membrane compression force in midspan AND the beam
gets a compression stress in the section top slab. This looks like the stress is taken twice but
internally a separate negative stiffness creates a negative reduction stress (correction beam).
This additional correction force is also taken into account in a SIR or DECREATOR cut. There
the sum of normal stress matches with the external acting force.

In the design all elements are designed correctly:

- the beam is designed in AQB including the normal stresses in the deck concrete slab
- the quad slab is designed in BEMESS including the normal stress from the global bending
For the upper reinforcement in the deck slab, the value of the beam design must not be added
to the value of the quad design. The maximum of both results can be used.

Centric beams on centric quads are as well treated as in the normal building t-beam-philosophy.

On TBEX AUTO, ASE applies the t-beam-philosophy to all beams where it makes sense. With
a following TBEX NOG 7 AREA 0 e.g. group 7 can be excluded from T-beam treatment.

The TBEX definition made in an ASE calculation is maintained in the database. It is used also
in the following ASE calculations as well as in CSM or SSD tasks. So it is best to define TBEX in
a separate ASE run just after the system definition, see example t_beam_bridge_excentric.dat

Internal procedure: with TBEX, ASE works different than in the normal building t-beam-
philosophy. The beam stiffness is not reduced and no quad forces are added to the beams.
Instead of this an additional negative stiffness is added to the global equation sytem to compen-
sate the double stiffness of the double concrete in QUAD+BEAM, see figure 2.11 in theoretic
principles.

e_q

Figure 3.14: Quad slab value AREA (red) and EX_Q (quad nodes on top surface)

In case the upper concrete slab is haunched, the exact value of the double area can be input
in AREA. With EX_Q the excentricity can be adapted (nodal plane - center of quad area). On
excentric quads EX_Q must be input positive (the sign is internally adapted to the quads). On
centric quads EX_Q points from the nodes in direction to the local z axis of the beams. Without
input on AREA ASE uses the thickness of the attaching quads but not more than the average
thickenss of the corresponding quad group (haunched deck slab). You should try to first scale
the stiffness with NEFF alone, EX_Q and AREA should be used only in extreme cases. Scaling

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-61

ASE | Input Description

wich NEFF:

NEFF: in case of a great width of the deck slab, the effective width over middle supports is
smaller. Also the effect of the quad slab for global bending MY is lower in this case - the
normal forces need some time (some space) to expand into the slab. This can be taken into
account with NEFF. With e.g. NEFF 0.2 you define that 20% of the area AREA of the deck
slab shall not be active for global bending MY. Intern the IY of the correction beam is reduced
and the correction beam is shifted 20% into the direction of the beam center. This reduces
the effect of the correction beam for MY global bending. The area of the correction beam is
not touched as there shall be no effect on the beam normal force N (prestress). Without an
input to TBEX-NEFF, ASE extracts a corresponding factor from the section in case NEFF has
been used in the AQUA section. Nevertheless the TBEX behavior can be adjusted with NEFF,
see example t_beam_bridge_excentric.dat and t_beam_excentric_test.dat . Common values
are NEFF=0.00 in midspan and NEFF=0.20 over middle supports. If you input NEFF in the
sections you can also work without NEFF in the TBEX input.

In case of steel composite sections, the pure steel part has a low transverse stiffness. Then a
free rotation of the nodes vertical to the quads may cause an instable equations system. Then
a reduction of F_IZ may help. To scale the VZ shear results you can also adjust GAZ with
f_GZ.

FIXE : ASE softens the TBEX effect a little bit at the end of a beam sequence. This can be
switched off with FIXE 1 (with FIXE 0.5 you get a lower reduction compared to the default, with
FIXE -0.5 a little higher TBEX reduction at beam sequence ends).

It may happen that with TBEX unexpected normal forces occur. If this disadvantage counts
more than the advantage of a full isotropic slab (better load distribution, transverse prestress)
you can also use the quad slab without normal stiffness with GRP2 QUEA 1E-5 as shown in
loadcase 103 in t_beam_excentric_test.dat.

Instable systems: as the correction beam is inserted with a negative stiffness it may occur
that the solver reports negative determinants. Then please follow the instructions in the error
message:
TBEX excentric T-beam philosophy: the negative stiffness of the correction beam may be too
big. Please first reduce F_IZ reduzieren (0.1), then F_GZ (0.2), then NEFF (0.5), then increase
the excentricity with TBEX ex_q (helps best on composite sections) then decrease the area
TBEX AREA. AREA and EX_Q with dimensions! In case you have reduced the concrete E
modulus in the beam for cracked stiffness or in case of other persistent instabilities: switch to
method with GRP2 ... QUEA 1E-5, see loadcase 103 in example t_beam_excentric_test.dat.’)

Another big advantage of this method compared to version 2018 is that it also works in combi-
nation with an influence line evaluation in ELLA.

Example see t_beam_bridge_excentric.dat

and: t_beam_excentric_test.dat
and: steel_composite_tbeam.dat (compare steel_composite_real.dat)

Conclusion:

• You don’t need two systems for the longitudinal beam and transverse quad design - you get
all forces in one system

3-62 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

• The quad slab can run full isotropic and can also be prestressed transverse
• Traffic can be evaluated for both beam and quad elements with ELLA
• Nevertheless the beam forces contain 100% of the longitudinal loading of the bridge for the
beam design
• Key sentence: as the correction beam compensates the stiffness of the quads in longitudi-
nal direction of the bridge, the real beam gets the full bending moment of the bridge as in a
discretisation with beams only.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-63

ASE | Input Description

3.18 REIQ – Reinforcement in QUAD Elements

See also: SYST, GRP

REIQ

Item Description Unit Default

LCR Design case number from the program BEMESS − -

(number of a reinforcement distribution)
FACT Multiplication factor − 1.0
LCRS Stored number of the reinforcement distribution − 99
CHKR steel stress from where an increase of reinforcement [N/ mm2] 1092 -
shall occur (old CHKS also still accepted)

ASE performs a nonlinear analysis of plates and shells according to cracked condition with a
given reinforcement. An increase of reinforcement can be controlled via REIQ-CHKR.

For the given reinforcement in any case the minimum reinforcement from BEMESS PARA or
the design parameter dialog is used. The reinforcement direction, concrete cover, bar diameter
and other data are also taken from there.

With REIQ a reinforcement of a design case LCR can be used from the design (BEMESS).
Nodal reinforcements are applied in all adjacent elements to get enough reinforcement in the
gauss points = shift of reinforcement. Element reinforcement is applied as well. In the following
figure, the 8 cm2/m reinforcement in the node of the supporting line is shifted to the first element
on the left, althogh BEMESS only calculated 7 cm2/m at for this element center. So for LCRS
99, 8 cm2/m are shown for this element center:

8 8 cm2/m

6 |
5 7
4

6 8
8
|—— gauss point

Figure 3.15: Shift of nodal reinforcement to neighboring elements, also without CHKR

The superposition of the minimum reinforcement with a design-reinforcement from BEMESS

is stored as now really used reinforcement distribution LCRS for graphical checks. If the rein-
forcement is increases due to CHKR, the increased reinforcement is stored.

Example see a2_nonlinear_slab.dat

CHKR: due to redistribution of forces in the nonlinear analysis often higher forces occur in

3-64 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

previous lower forced regions. This can cause very high steel stress and crack width due to
the low reinforcement of the linear design in these regions. With input of a limit for the steel
stress CHKR ASE then increases the reinforcement during the nonlinear iterations to keep the
steel stresses below CHKR. Intern ASE does not check the steel stress but the strain. So
also in elements without given reinforcement a reinforcement is inserted if the strain exceeds
CHKR/ES with ES=200000. This is to avoid big cracks also in such elements. A run with the
minimum reinforcement without an LCR of BEMESS just input NSTR - CHKR 400. If ASE
increases a reinforcement due to CHKR, ASE ends with an error message and the advise to
check the new necessary total reinforcement id design case LCRS (an error message is done
to clearly point out this issue).

Please also notice that even in pure slabs horizontal deflections and normal forces occur due
to the crack opening in a nonlinear analysis. Such (excentric) compression normal stressses
can carry a part of the load and reduced the pure bending moments.

For beam elements input for reinforcement cases are possible in BEW.

For the reinforcement direction the following rules are valid:

- At first they are used from BEMESS PARA or the design parameter dialog
- BEMESS or SOFICAD-B reinforcement is taken into account with the smallest angle
deviation to already existing directions.
- If nothing is defined, reinforcement bars are used with an angle of 0 and 90 degree.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-65

ASE | Input Description

3.19 STEX – External Stiffness

See also: GRP, SYST

STEX

Item Description Unit Default

NAME Name of the external stiffness file LT24 *

OPT ITER: treat halfspace stiffness iteratively (without full − -
conditioned stiffness matrix)
NONL old input: NONL 1 has the same effect as OPT ITER − -
please better use OPT ITER instead of NONL 1

A complete external stiffness can be added with STEX. External stiffnesses are generated
currently only by the program HASE for the halfspace (stiffness coefficient method). The project
name is the default for NAME. The mere input of STEX (without name) suffices usually.

With STEX OPT ITER the halfspace stiffness can be used iteratively. Then only the diagonal
therms are used and the off diagonal therms are treated iteratively (residual force iteration).
For big systems this is also senseful for linear calculations because full conditioned stiffness
matrix is often too big for the solver or the calculation time too long. Usage:

– SYST PROB LINE $ siehe Beispiel -> hase1_bottomslab.dat

STEX
LC 1,2,3
Linear analysis with the full conditioned stiffness matrix for small systems.
– SYST PROB LINE $ siehe Beispiel -> hase2_3d.dat
STEX OPT ITER
LC 1
Linear iterative analysis for big systems. Only one load case in one ASE part (HEAD-
END) allowed. No nonlinear effects are taken into account. The result loadcases can be
superposed with MAXIMA.
– SYST PROB NONL $ siehe Beispiel -> hase2_3d.dat
STEX OPT ITER
LC 1
Nichtlinear effects as bottom slab lifting on tension or nonlinear pile bedding are treated.
A superposition with MAXIMA is usually not possible.

Halfspace examples via HASE:

Task Input file

Usage for big systems hase2_3d.dat
Variable soil in ground view hase5_profile_interpolation.dat
Halfspace with simple piles hase8_slab_with_piles.dat
Table continued on next page.

3-66 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Task Input file

Pier with inclined piles hase23_pier_foundation.dat
Bottomslab-pile interaction kpp1.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-67

ASE | Input Description

3.20 OBLI – Inclination

See also: GRP, SYST, LC

OBLI

Item Description Unit Default

SX Inclination in X direction − 0
SY Inclination in Y direction − 0
SZ Inclination in Z direction − 0
LC Load case number of a available load case − -
FACV Factor for displacements of LC − -
VMAX Factor for imperfection [m] 1001 -
DIRE Scaling direction of imperfection − -
XX,YY,ZZ

With OBLI it is possible to input a global inclination of the system. With the input of SX=1/200
for example all nodes get an inclination of u-x=1/200·height. The used height is the height
above the node which is the lowest one in dead weight direction (see program SOFIMSHA/-
SOFIMSHC record SYST GDIR).

The global inclination affects also the linear calculation according to first-order theory. It acts
on all elements and also on mixed systems for example from beam and shell elements. In the
same way a imperfection of the beam axes is considered due to the misalignment → lateral
buckling.

The input OBLI must occur before the definition of the load cases and acts then for all load
cases of this ASE calculation.

Imperfection

With OBLI LC FACV an additional load case can be defined for imperfections, also if
another primary load case is used with SYST PLC. The imperfection load case in OBLI is used
always as a non-stressed one and the normally usual input GRP ... FACL is not necessary.
Thus the input is easier and simultaneously more flexible. The input SYST ... FACV should
be omitted in future. Alternatively (to FACL) a maximum imperfection can be scaled with
OBLI VMAX. DIRE defines the scaling direction if necessary (without DIRE the maximum
diplacementvector is scaled). For example OBLI LC 91 VMAX -0.050 DIRE YY describes an
imperfection affin to load case 91 with a maximum value in global Y direction of - 50 mm.

An imperfection has here effects on the internal forces and moments of the first- and
second-order theory. Note please, that an imperfection via OBLI does not generate local beam
curvatures, however, a polyline-like continuous beam imperfection.

The displacements always contain the sum of the displacement from the inclination plus addi-
tional deformation! So the inclination can be controlled graphically. If die additional deformation
shall be printed separately, please first create a loadcase with pure inclination (DLZ=0.000001).

3-68 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Then calcualte a following loadcase, using the previous as PLC, apply the load and request
storage of differential displacement with CTRL DIFF.

Further possibilities for the input of imperfections:

- affin imperfections from scaled primary load case

- imperfections from buckling eigenvalue (multiple OBLI-LC lines allowed)
example ase9_quad_euler_beam.dat
and: ase12_buckling_slab.dat
- precurvature of beams for example with temperature load delta-t/h or local curvature
TYPE KY or KZ see example ase11_girder_overturning.dat

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-69

ASE | Input Description

3.21 SLIP – SLIP Cable

SLIP

Item Description Unit Default

NOSL SLIP cable number − -

NOG Group number of the cable elements − -
group 0 is not allowed
NOEL Element number of the cable element − -
MUE friction value − 0

A SLIP cable group contains a number of cable elements that act as a single cable.

SLIP NOSL 4 NOG 4 assigns all cables of the element group 4 to the SLIP Cable No
4.

SLIP NOSL 5 NOEL 717,718,719 summarizes the cable elements to the SLIP Cable
5.

There are two types of slip cables: with friction or without friction

Slip Cable without friction:

On mue=0 a common normal force is enforced for all single cables. Thus they can slide
at intermediate points. The common normal force is determined from the total strain of the
corresponding cables divided by their total length. As all cables together build a total stiffness
bubble, this also works in a linear analysis. But therefor the inner cable sagging is automatically
switched off for these cables. In WINGARF/GRAFIX the axial displacement shows the nodal
deformation change. This can be used to visualize the slip effect. Furthermore the slip is
printed in the ASE output.
Example see slip_cable.dat

Slip Cable with friction:

Important: using Slip cables with friction the cable sequence is important! The friction is
calculated from one cable to the next in the sequence of the cable number.
On mue>0.0 a slip cable only slips in case the force difference exceeds the friction. As this is
not known a priori in a linear analsis, a cable with mue>0.0 only slips in a nonlinear analysis!
In Fig. 3.16 the left cable is stressed and the right cable is released under a horizontal loading
of the mast. In case the force difference would exceeds the friction at the crosshead, the cable
slips in a nonlinear analysis. Thus the left cable will get longer, the right cable shorter. See
example slip_cable_mue.dat

3-70 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Figure 3.16: Cable with friction at the crosshead

In a TH3 analysis the angle at the crosshead is updated and also includes the part of the inner
cable sagging. So also in a straight system the inner cable sagging causes an angle between
the two cable ends and a friction effect, see fig. 3.17. But then all individual cables must have
a sagging. If e.g. one vertical cable is inside the slip group, then die inner cable sagging is
switched off for all cables of the slip group.

Figure 3.17: Friction in a straight system due to angle of inner cable sagging

The definition of a SLIP Cable which is input in an ASE calculation is maintained in the
database. It is used also in the following calculations. A new SLIP input in a further ASE
calculation or a SLIP input without further parameters deletes the SLIP Cable definition in the
database.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-71

ASE | Input Description

3.22 VOLU – Air Volume Element

VOLU

Item Description Unit Default

NO VOLU element number (without group) − -

GRP associated QUAD-elements − -
POSI QUAD element face (POSZ or NEGZ) LT POSZ
MNO material number of the volume − 0
default 0 = air under standard air pressure
m3
 
V0 starting volume 1008 -
kN/ m2
 
P0 given pressure (without stiffness) 1192 -
kN/ m3
 
DPZ dp/dz pressure increase on increasing z (water: neg- 1193 -
ative pressure is not applied)
PLC primary load case (default = SYST PLC) − *
m3
 
DV volumen add-on 1008 -
DT temperature increase [grd] 1215 -
MASS mass participation − 0.5
(0.5 = apply 50 % of air masse in eigenfrequency
analysis)
OPT ITER: treat VOLU stiffness iteratively (without full con- − AUTO
ditioned stiffness matrix)
FULL = use full conditioned matrix
AUTO = use ITER for more than 1000 nodes

VOLU defines an air volume on a face of quad elements. VOLU distributes the air pressure
uniformly onto the participated surfaces. VOLU is mainly used for membrane air cushions.

VOLU can work in two different ways:

With P0 input the air pressure P0 remains constant, the air volume can change with deforma-
tions (connected air compressor).
Without P0 the amount of air is constant and the pressure will change on loading and defor-
mations.

Without P0 input ASE generates a stiffness matrix that represents the compressibility of the
enclosed air volume (stiffness bubble). With P0 input this is not necessary and the analysis is
much faster.

An air pressure defined with VOLU-P0 is updated during the ASE-iterations and loads the ro-
tated quad area. Also an increase of the quad area during formfinding updates the air pressure
load! This is not done using SOFILOAD loads - see example air_volume_tennis.dat

An input VOLU without further data delets VOLU elements of a previous ASE run. Without

3-72 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

VOLU-input all VOLU data is taken from the last run but without old load input P0, DV ir DT.
With a VOLU input using only the VOLU number (without GRP, POSI, VO input) new loads for
existing VOLU elements can be set.

A VOLU analysis without P0 input creates a fully occupied stiffness matrix which causes high
computation time. Therfore the number of contact nodes on the volume with OPT FULL should
not be greater than about 2000 (maximum 5000)! In general the number of iterations should
be 200 or higher, the tolerance should be reduced, see example air_cushion.dat

Further explanations see:

Air pressure hall air_volume_tennis.dat

Air cushion air_cushion.dat

Please also ask for the corresponding SOFiSTiK paper contributed to the CIMNE Membranes
2011 conference.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-73

ASE | Input Description

3.23 MOVS – Moving Spring

See also: V0, LAUN

MOVS

Item Description Unit Default

NO Spring number (GRP see below) − -

TYPE Type : spring shall look for a contact to: − 1
BGRP contact to beam elements of group FROM-
TO
CGRP contact to a group of cable elements
TGRP contact to a group of truss elements
QGRP contact to quad elements of group FROM-
TO
3 contact to QUAD elements (FROM-TO ele-
ment numbers)
FROM Start number of groups, nodes or elements − 1
TO End number − FROM
INC Increment − 1
L0 Initial length for springs without end node N2 [LT/ m] 1001 -
TRAN Consideration of the longitudinal and rota-
tional effects with total deformations
TRA0 as TRAN but incremental deformations
GRP instead of NO: all springs of group GRP − -
TOLT Tolerance contact search transverse (not for TYPE 1) m -
DIRE spring direction −/ LT FIX
FIX keep system spring direction
FREE update direction = contact direction
no: use directon of this beam number no
OUTF Outside Fixing LT -
FIX If MOVS does not find a contact, set
MOVS to support spring, e.g. if the
MOVS train is still ahead of the bridge, see
movs_train_load_passing.dat

Examples to MOVS Input file

Launching csm40_incremental_launching_introduction.dat
Contact movs_train_interaction.dat
load passing movs_train_load_passing.dat
Table continued on next page.

3-74 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Examples to MOVS Input file

Contact movs_car_collision.dat
Kinematic excavator.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

An input MOVS without further data delets MOVS elements of previous ASE runs.

With an input for L0 the definition of the springs is more simple, because only a direction has to
be input and no node for kinematic constraint. In SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC or the graphical input
only a normal spring without 2. node must be defined. The direction of the spring DX,DY+DZ
then only defines the rough direction in which the spring will look for a contact. The length -
important for the contact - will then be defined in ASE MOVS L0.

The definition of MOVS in an ASE calculation is maintained in the database. It is used also
in the following calculations. A new MOVS input in a further ASE calculation or a MOVS input
without further parameters deletes the MOVS definition in the database.

Launching nose: on incremental launching you best define the segemnts starting with group
1. For 17 groups you get group 1-17 for the superstructrure. Then best use group 18 for the
launching nose to define the moving springs with MOVS ... TYPE BGRP FROM 1 TO 18.

For two longitudinal beams you can leave both in the same group. MOVS ... TYPE BGRP
always searches the best beam for each moving spring.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-75

ASE | Input Description

3.24 LAUN – Incremental Launching

See also: MOVS

LAUN

Item Description Unit Default

GRP Group number (-1 for a new step) − -

CSM use launching from CSM
e.g. LAUN ’CSM’ CS 40
DX Total displacement [m] 1001 0
DY [m] 1001 0
DZ [m] 1001 0
XM Coordinates of a centre point for a [m] 1001 -
YM rotation around a global axis [m] 1001 -
ZM [m] 1001 -
NR1 Reference points for a rotation − -
NR2 around a free axis − -
PHI Rotation (in radiant) [rd] 3 -
CS stage number from CSM on usage e.g. LAUN ’CSM’ -
CS 40 , see example csm41_launching_principle.dat
VX Velocity (time step analysis dynamics) see example [m/ sec] 1201 -
movs_train_load_passing.dat
REF Axis (time step analysis dynamics) see example LT -
movs_train_on_axis.dat
incl. curve centrifugal loads for MOVS TYPE BGRP

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=euuJqK8TqFk

Examples launching Input file

Launching ASE movs_incremental_launching_principle.dat
Launching CSM csm41_launching_principle.dat
Launching training csm40_launching_introduction.dat
Kinematic kinematic_1.dat
Beam rotations beam_rotation.dat
Excavator excavator.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

A detailed description and training can be found in the CSM manual: Theoretical background -
Incremental Launching Training.

An input LAUN shifts the nodes of the element group GRP with DX,DY,DZ. An input of XM

3-76 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

and YM rotates around the centre point with PHI [ rad] as arc length (around global Z axis).
Starting on a PLC primary load case, the launching input is the new total displacement.

A rotation around X- and Y- axis is possible with

Input LAUN XM+YM : rotation around Z axis

Input LAUN YM+ZM : rotation around X axis
Input LAUN XM+ZM : rotation around Y axis

A rotation of systems around a free axis is possible with input LAUN NR1 NR2 by two reference
nodes to defined the rotation axis.

Also multiple rotations and displacements can be defined, separated by a LAUN -1 line:

LAUN GRP 71 PHI 0.4 YM 3 ZM 3 $ rotation around the X axis

LAUN -1
LAUN GRP 71,72 PHI 0.3 XM 0 YM 0 $ followed by a rotation around Z axis

Problems may occur if two beams attach to a node and one beam rotates and the other not.
Then the nodal LAUN nodal rotation is not clear and we assume:
If the starting node of a beam rotates, the local coordinate system of the beam rotates. If the
starting node of a beam does not rotate, the beam does not rotate (as shown in the animator
beam coordinate system).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-77

ASE | Input Description

3.25 SFIX – Fixing Stiffness

See also: GRP

SFIX

Item Description Unit Default

LC Load case number − *

PLC Load case number of the normal force and effective − LC
cable stiffness

Usage with one input line SFIX LC:

With one input line SFIX LC (PLC is set to LC) for all elements (BEAM,QUAD,SPRI...) the ge-
ometric stiffness according to the normalforce of the PLC is added. So e.g. a set of loadcases
can be analyzed with a unique geometric stiffness (TH3). This allows a later superposition with
MAXIMA (linearization of the analysis). If a nonlinear material stiffness had been calculated
with AQB in the PLC, this nonlinear stiffness is also used.

In case the PLF was analyzed with inner cable sagging, the effective stiffness of the PLC is
used. So for a cable stayed bridge you can first optimize a geometric nonlinear final system
with CSM-OPTI and then use the effective stiffness for further quasi linear analysis.

Usage with multiple input lines for beam systems:

Here the minimum of the AQB stiffness is determined from a series of load cases LC. With
that and together with the geometrical stiffness from the normal force of a PLC a linear beam
calculation is performed, so that the superposition principle is valid for following superposition.

Example witn nonlinear AQB beam stiffness: sfix.dat

Effektive cable stiffness and TH3 stiffness: optimize_csm21_cable_anchorage_angle.dat
TH3 stiffness for influence evaluation with ELLA:
optimize_csm28_suspension_bridge_real.dat
Eigenfrequencies on cracked beam: aseaqb_1_column_cracked.dat

3-78 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.26 FIXT – Temporary Fixing

See also: GRP, GRP2

FIXT

Item Description Unit Default

REF Reference type LT !

NODE nodes (all elements)
GRP Group all element types
BGRP Group of beam elements
TGRP Group of truss elements
CGRP Group of cable elements
QGRP Group of QUAD elements
VGRP Group of BRIC elements
NO Node number or group number LT/ − !
’ALL’ = for all nodes/groups

UX Stiffness in x or: LT, kN/ m !

FIX stiffness 1E9[kN/m] for all directions and ro-
tations
FREE release stiffness for all directions and rota-
tions
UY If either FIX or FREE LT, kN/ m -
UZ is given for UX, all 6 degrees must be input LT, kN/ rd -
PHIX for UX-PHIZ , LT, kNm/ rd -
PHIY e.g. UX 0 0 1E9 0 0 0 (only fix uz) LT, kNm/ rd -
PHIZ LT, kNm/ m -

XMIN Selection box: parameters are only set for nodes [m] 1001 -
XMAX inside this box. [m] 1001 -
YMIN If not all nodes of an element are inside the box, [m] 1001 -
YMAX only the nodes inside the box are set. [m] 1001 -
ZMIN Can be mixed with an GRP input. [m] 1001 -
ZMAX no input : up to infinite [m] 1001 -

With FIXT you can e.g. study the local buckling of a column. Best also use the flexibility
restraint (weakness) of the column-slab connection within a region of +- 2.00 m (column at
x=5.00, y=13.00):

FIXT NODE ALL FIX $ first fix all nodes of the system $
FIXT NODE ALL FREE xmin 3.0 7.0 ymin 11.0 15.0 $ release this region $
EIGE 6 BUCK LMIN AUTO LC 2001

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-79

ASE | Input Description

Figure 3.18: Selection box around the column -> flexibility restraint in the slab

Figure 3.19: Local buckling of a column - Buckling eigenvalue 3.45

3-80 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.27 ACTB – Active Bending

See also: GRP

ACTB

Item Description Unit Default

NO Group number − -
MEND bending moment at beam ends − FIX
FIX bending moment at ends is possible
FREI bending moment at ends is 0
MT torsion moment due to spacial beam rotation − FREI
FIX take into account torsional curvature of the
system
FREI to not apply torsional curvature

See also theorectical background, Active Bending

Usage e.g. ACTB 2,3 :

The beam elements of group 2 and 3 are treated as active bending elements and get a stress
state that would relax the beam to a straight beam if no further loads or fixings act.
Or in other words: it is assumed that the beam originally was a straight beam and was only
bended linear into the sytem shape.

Example see active_bending_overview.dat

In case the start and the end of the Active Bending beam chain is not restraint, MEND FREE
can be input. Then at the first and last node definitely no curvature stress state is applied.

In case also a torsional curvature shall be analyzed from the system curvature, MT FIX should
be input. But also without MT FIX ASE will calculate a torsional moment in the beams if this is
necessary for the equilibrium. But then an additional torsional curvature will appear.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-81

ASE | Input Description

3.28 LC – Load Case and Masses

See also: LCC, MASS

LC

Item Description Unit Default

NO Load case number − !

ALL All load cases (but design, perm...)
TEST Instability test
ITER all LC from CSM-OPTI
FACT Factor for all loads − 1.0
FACD Factor dead load in gravity direction − 0.0
DLX (Factor dead load in X - earthquake) − 0.0
DLY (Factor dead load in Y) − 0.0
DLZ (Factor in gravity direction) to be input positiv also in − 0.0
case the z-axis points upward!
-> better use FACD; this works as in SOFILOAD
BET2 Coefficient for crack width calculation − 0.5
0.5 longtime loading
1.0 short-term loading
TITL Load case designation LT32 *
TYPE Type/Action of load case − -
GAMU Unfavourable safty factor − *
GAMF Favourable safty factor − *
PSI0 Rare combination value rare − *
PSI1 Frequent combination value frequent − *
PSI2 Quasi-permanent combination value − *
PS1S Non-frequent combination value − *
CRI1 Criteria 1,2,3: Without input a nonlinear analysis − 0
stores: CRI1=iterations (0 = no convergencs found)
CRI2=max. residual force, CRI3=energy
For eigenmodes, CRI1-2-3 = activated modal rotation
mass around X-Y-Z (cdb-RX,RY,RZ then shows the
modal partizipation factors in X-Y-Z)
CRI2 Criteria 2 − 0
CRI3 Criteria 3 − 0

LC activates a load case. All loads which are input after the LC record are assigned to this load
case. The factor FACT affects all loads, however, not the temperature, strain and prestressing
loads! It does not affect DLX, DLY or DLZ dead loads. The loads are saved in the database
without factor.

3-82 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

LC ALL calculates all load cases stored in the database from LC 1 to 9999.
LC TEST without further input activates the instability test. Comes aufomatically only for insta-
ble systems.

For a negative dead load direction which is defined in the program SOFIMSHA/SOFIMSHC
with SYST GDIR (e.g. SYST...GDIR=NEGZ) a positive value has to be input in LC DLx for a
load in dead load direction (negative global direction). An error message follows for the input
of a negative value (e.g. LC DLZ -1.00), because a double negation is misleading. A warning
follows for a negative inputs unequal to -1.00 (e.g. for earthquake).

We recommend to use LC FACD 1.0. This works as in SOFILOAD. A positive input creates a
load in dead load direction.

If dead loads should be used from the program SOFiLOAD, then only the load case number
NO has to be input for LC. If factors of the structural dead weight or other loading are defined
after a LC record, all loading data for that load case will be deleted, to allow the redefinition of
loading for a given load case.

If no designation was input, the program generates automatically a title from the dead load
factors as well as from the support sum.

The action type and the corresponding safety factors and combination coefficients may be
defined already here for a later superposition with program MAXIMA. Several literals which
are described in detail in the record ACT of the program SOFILOAD are possible for TYPE. If
safety factors and combination coefficients which are different from the default should be used,
these can be input here. If the superposition factors are defined with the program SOFiLOAD
or MAXIMA, nothing is to be input here for TYPE to PS1S.

Values CRI1 to CRI3 are very general parameters of the load case. They may be used freely
for postprocessing. You may specify them in advance or set them after the analysis by reading
some results from the database. (e.g. a system dimension, a strength reduction etc.) TALPA
uses CRI1 for the safety factor of the material needed by analysis according to Fellenius. The
criteria are set subsequently without further inputs with:

LC TYPE PROP CRI1 ... CRI2 ... CRI3 ...

During dynamic analysis ASE determines the dead weight of all elements according to its
definition in the material records respective the cross section parameters. Additional masses
can be defined with the record MASS. Therefore for eigenvalue determinations the dead load
has not to be input in the record LC. For the dynamic time step method the mass inputs from
ASE or DYNA are transformed to dead loads now with an input LC...DLZ, because these are
used as masses and therefore they have to produce dead load. Vertical slab eigenvalues can
be avoided with MASS FACT.

With LC FACT ’iter’ the last factor of a CSM optimization can be used.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-83

ASE | Input Description

3.29 ELLO – Quad tendon prestress

See also: LC
ELLO

Item Description Unit Default

TYPE Type pf loading : PRE = quad tendon prestress − !

PCS Baubschnittsnummer der Spannglieder die anges- − !
pannt werden sollen

Example: ELLO TYPE PRE PCS 11

with this, all tendons that are defined in Tendon with CS ICS1 11 are stressed.

Remark: the input of a loadcase number in TENDON is not necessary. With ELLO the pre-
stress can also be applied.

It is also not possible to input two tendons with the same LC number but different ICS1. This
would cause an error in ASE. Tendons with same stage ICS1 must be defined with the same
LC number.

3-84 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.30 TEMB – Temperature for BRIC Elements

See also: LC
TEMB

Item Description Unit Default

NO node number − !
0 for the header line with T0, IPOS, KALK
T0 starting temperature Grd !
IPOS position of the temperature T1...T22 − 1
CALC o for Siliceous, 1 for Calcareous aggregates − 0
T1 temperature on input IPOS=1 Grd -
T2 temperature on input IPOS=2 Grd -
... T22 temperature up to input IPOS=22 Grd -
For IPOS also floating numbers are allowed, e.g. 1.5
interlolates between T1 and T2

In a header line with NR 0 first parameters are set. In following lines the temperature can be
set with T1... for the bric nodes NO.

Usage see ase.dat/../bric/bric_on_fire

Features:

• On a uniaxial loading, in the beginning a parable behavior is used as in a concrete work

lay, see plot in example bric_lade_parable_softening.dat :

Figure 3.20: parable behavior as in a concrete work law

• On multiaxial loading, the possible stress is limited in addition by the material law LADE.
• The thermal elongation is calculated according EN 1992-1-2:2004 3.3.1, see example
lade_on_fire_beam_expansion_free.dat :

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-85

ASE | Input Description

Figure 3.21: thermal elongation

• If you restrain the elongation in this example you get high compression stresses. In this pro-
cess, the strength is reduced depending on the temperature according EN 1992-1-2:2004
table 3.1, see example lade_on_fire_beam_expansion_restraint.dat
• The reinforcement is best modelled with enbedded truss elements:

Figure 3.22: Truss elements in the BRIC volume as reinforcement beams

• These reinforcement beams get the actual temperature from the BRIC elements and re-
ceive the correct thermal elongation and a reduced strength according EN 1992-1-2:2004
table 3.2a class N cold worked.
• The temperature in the BRIC elements can either be calculated with program HYDRA, see
example lade_on_fire_column_hydra.dat :

Figure 3.23: Temperature from instationary HYDRA analysis

• or imported via ASCII table, see example lade_on_fire_column_temperature_data.dat

• The maximum strenght reduction as well as the maximum thermal elongation is printed for
every load step in a statistic report:

3-86 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Figure 3.24: Statistics

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-87

ASE | Input Description

3.31 TEMP – Temperature from HYDRA

See also: LC, GRP, GRP2

TEMP

Item Description Unit Default

NO Load case number of the temperature calculation − !

T1 Time of the interval beginning sec 0
T2 Time of the interval end sec T1
NOG Element group which is to be loaded − *
Default: all groups
FACT Factor of the loading − 1.0
EMOD Stiffness modification of the elastic modulus for BRIC LT YES
elements with HYDRA temperature fields, see also
GRP2 ALP0
YES Consideration of the stiffness modification
OFF No consideration of the stiffness modifica-
tion
value Development of elastic modulus according
to Wesche
RELA Consideration of the relaxation via a reduced E LT NO
modulus according to ’Technischen Empfehlungen
Bautechnick BAW / Wesche’
YES Consideration
NO No consideration
EXPO Exponent for the elastic modulus according to "Braun- − 1/2
schweiger Stoffmodell"

After a transient temperature calculation with the program HYDRA the element group NOG with
the temperature differences of the time T2-T1 from the HYDRA load case NO can be loaded
with this record. With that changing material properties or support conditions can be examined
in the course of the temperature development (e.g. variable elastic modulus during setting of
the green concrete). The time values T1 and T2 are arbitrary. For missing exact time values
from the program HYDRA the temperature is interpolated linearly between two available time
values or an end temperature is used. For T1=T2 the temperature is used to this time.

If a stationary calculation occurred, the temperature is used fully in spite of an input for T1 and
T2.

The temperature loading is applied currently only to BRIC and QUAD elements.

The input via GRP...FACT omits and is not anymore possible.

For the hydration of volume elements the elastic modulus can be still modified according to the
"Braunschweiger Stoffmodell" with an exponent:

3-88 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

α − α0 EXPO
 
E = E28 · (3.1)
1 − α0

The input is done with TEMP ... EMOD YES EXPO ...

For BRIC elements the HYDRA temperature fields are implemented by varying material stiff-
ness according to Wesche: With input TEMP ... EMOD=value the development of elastic
modulus is activated according to Wesche. The value has to be be input as a·w/z , e.g. for Z25
value=7.1·0.4 = 2.84.

The development of E-modulus can now be switched off per group with TEMP...EMOD OFF.

Example see: bric_hydra_dt2h.dat

BAW / Wesche: ripe_creep_comparision.dat

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-89

ASE | Input Description

3.32 PEXT – Prestress of External Cables

PEXT

Item Description Unit Default

NOG Group number or − -

NOEL Number of a cable of the cable-chain − -
P0 Prestressing force at stressing anchorage kN -
SIDE Prestressing side − -
POSX, POSY, POSZ, NEGX, NEGY, NEGZ
MUE Friction coefficient − -
BETA Unintensional wobble angle (imperfect inclination) deg/ m -
SS Slip at stressing anchorage mm -

Cable groups or single cables can be selected with the record PEXT for prestressing. The
cable side which is prestressed is defined with SIDE. For example POSX defines the cable
side with the larger X coordinate.

For external tendons see also CTRL QTYP V2.

3-90 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Figure 3.25: Example: cable over two internal blocks

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-91

ASE | Input Description

3.33 LCC – Copy of Loads

See also: LC
LCC

Item Description Unit Default

NO Number of an already defined load case − !

FACT Load factor − 1.0
A Sofiload time function is applied see example
step_sofiload_ase.dat
ULTI Load factor increase at the ultimate load iteration − YES
YES
OFF
ALL
see record ULTI
Prestress-, temperature loads and settlements will
only be increased on ’ALL’ see record LC FACT
PLC Temperature and strain loads for primary load cases − NEW
YES no use of temperature and strain loads au-
tomatically LC had been active in PLC
NEW use of all loads (Load acts for the first time)

LCC can be used to copy loads from other load cases into the current load case. Inputs for
prestress loads from the program TENDON are accepted as well. However, here the user must
pay attention to the settings in the GRP -CS record. The cpoied loadcases LCS shound not
include dead weight factors - they should be input in ASE LC DLX, DLY, DLZ.

If a load cases was already considered in the primary load case, only real loads have to be
defined again when using the primary load case. Temperature or strain loads must not be
defined again, because they act additive. These loads are extracted now automatically with
PLC = YES. If for instance the load factor LC ... FACT is increased during a limit load iteration,
the difference temperature is used additionally. Default is PLC NEW, all loads are used.

In a dynamic time step analysis a SOFILOAD FUNC time funktion will be used. The factor
FACT will be multiplied with the time function using the time at the end of the actual time
interval (time of PLC + dt/2).

Base point accelerations from SOFILOAD (Effective force method und Large Mass Method)
can also be used in LCC.

Examples to LCC Input file

Using PLC technique ase6_two_span_girder_construction_stages.dat
LCC ULTI OFF load increase push_over_quad_beam_frame.dat
Table continued on next page.

3-92 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Examples to LCC Input file

Loadfunction SOFILOAD a1_dynamic_overview.dat
Earthquake a2_introduction_earthquake.dat
Large mass method a3_introduction_base_acceleration.dat
Cinematic mashine loads excavator.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

More detailed explanation on temperature and PLC YES/NEW:

The most important idea is:

Please think of the situation that you use a primary load case and apply the same loads, that
means you will not get additional deformations:
- you use the PLC in SYST - with this, all elements get the stress from the PLC and they would
like to deform backwards without other loads
- to avoid this you must apply the same loads as in the PLC so that these loads are in equilib-
rium with the stresss from the PLC

Now to temperature:
The temperature is not a real external load but only introduces stresses in the elements.
If you only apply a temperature load in load case 1, the elements will get longer without any
stress (unrestrained system).
If you use load case 1 as primary load case PLC (LC 1 has no stress) without any new loading
(also without temperature), the new total load vector is 0 and you will not get any delta defor-
mation, that means the deformation and load case two will be the same as in loadcase 1 =
correct.

If you use load case 1 as primary load case PLC and apply a loadcase LCC PLC NEW with
new temperature (the same temperature), the elements will get a delta elongation, that means
the deformation will be twice the deformation of loadcase 1 !!!!

You see real loads in kN must be applied again, but temperature loads not !!!!

So if you do not want to change the elongation and you use LCC with all loads from the primary
load case, the temperature loads must be filtered out, because otherwise they would act twice,
and that’s the thing you control with LCC PLC YES or PLC NEW.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-93

ASE | Input Description

3.34 EIGE – Eigenvalues and -vectors

See also: SYST, GRP, LC

EIGE

Item Description Unit Default

NEIG Number of the sought eigenvalues − !

ETYP Method for eigenvalue calculation LT LANC
Buckling eigenvalue solver for large systems:
BUCK Simultaneous vector iteration
First positive with LMIN AUTO
Dynamic eigenvalue solver:
SIMU Simultaneous vector iteration
LANC Method of Lanczos

NITE Number of iteration or Lanczos vectors − *

MITE Maximum number of iterations − *
LMIN Eigenvalue shift − or 0
LMIN AUTO to search the first positive buckling eigen- rd2 / sec2
value

LC Load case number of the smallest eigen mode shape − 2001

OPT Options − *
1 Include Missing Mass (see DYNA)

The input of EIGE causes the use and possibly the determination of eigenvalues and eigen-
mode shapes.

See also YOUTUBE Video https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ui9qVyoSYZs

For dynamic eigenvalues the masses from dead load γ are used always. All further masses
(record MASS) from the generation program and ASE are considered additionally. Vertical slab
eigenvalues can be avoided with MASS FACT.

With SYST PLC ... the geometric stiffness is added also in a dynamic eigenvalue analysis (a
piano string swings faster if the string force is higher)

In a buckling eigenvalue analysis often only negative eigenvalues appear. They represent fail-
ure under a negative load factor. In this case with LMIN AUTO automatically an eigenvalueshift
can be determined and applied to avoid the negative eigenvalues and find the first positive one.
Example see buckling_eigenvalue_shift.dat

For dynamic eigenvalues yu should not input ETYP, LANC is usually the best. On small NEIG
you can increase NITE to achieve a higher accuracy. The default value for NITE is the minimum
between NEIG+2 and the number of the unknowns.

3-94 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

The method according to Lanczos is also significantly quicker than the vector iteration, if a
large number of eigenvalues is sought.

The modal damping is calculated from the defined dampings of the groups after the determi-
nation of the eigenvalues.

See also chapter theoretical orinciples eigenvalues (incl. examples).

Please notice: there is another nice feature to get buckling eigenvalues e.g. for specific groups,
see figue at FIXT

Eigenvalue determinations are not possible with the basic program version.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-95

ASE | Input Description

3.35 MASS – Lumped Masses

MASS

Item Description Unit Default

NO Node number − !
MX Translational mass t 0.
MY Translational mass t MX
MZ Translational mass t MX
MXX Rotational mass tm2 0.
MYY Rotational mass tm2 0.
MZZ Rotational mass tm2 0.
LC Load case for mass conversion - -
PRZ Factor in percent % 100
default 100 = full conversion
SELE Selection of load direction LT PG
PG or PXX or PYY or PZZ

Examples to MASS Input file

LC mass conversion ase4_eigenfrequencies.dat
Earthquake a1_dynamic_overview.dat
-> Example overviews -> Summary of example overviews

The masses are additional to those defined in the program SOFIMSH*. They are maintained
over several input sets until they are redefined. Please notice that only SOFIMSH* masses
also produce dead load in a static analysis! ASE additional masses don’t act as dead load
e.g. dlz in a static load cases [ except in a time step analysis where they act as dead load and
dynamic mass} ! MASS 0 can be used to delete all additional masses from ASE+DYNA. With
MASS LC 0 additional masses defined in a previous run are applied.

A mass acts usually the same in all three coordinate directions and thus, it need to be defined
independently only for special cases. Rotational masses with inclined axis are not used in
ASE.

The dead weight of the entire structure is applied in the form of translational masses. Only
beam elements also create rotational massses.

MASS can be used also to import nodal loads from the database as masses to ASE. The load
case number must be input in LC. The conversion factor has to be defined in PRZ. PRZ = 100
means full mass conversion. Other loads then loads in dead weight direction must be selected
with SELE. Please check the sum of masses in the output! The input

3-96 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

MASS LC 12 PRZ 100

creates translational masses from all loads of load case 12 in the direction of the dead weight.
By default the masses are applied as X, Y and Z mass. If this is not desired, they can be
factorized additionally with MX,MY and MZ, e.g. MASS LC 12 PRZ 100 MX 1.0 MY 0.2 MZ
1.0.

Masses can get also a factor with MASS. For this purpose the literal FACT has to be input for
NO. This can be reasonable particularly for larger systems, where it is favourable to suppress
many low frequencies which are not essential for the analysis. With the input

MASS FACT MZ 0.01

The mass in global Z direction is reduced to one percent only. So vertical slab eigenvalues of
big buildings can be avoided. MASS FACT works additive to MASS inputs and has an effect
on the automatic element dead load mass. With MASS FACT 1 1 1 0 0 0 rotational masses
can be suppressed.

See also chapter theoretical orinciples masses (incl. examples).

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-97

ASE | Input Description

3.36 V0 – Initial Velocity

See also: MOVS

V0

Item Description Unit Default

NO Node number (GRP see below) − -

VX Initial velocities in global [m/ sec] 1201 0
VY directions [m/ sec] 1201 0
VZ [m/ sec] 1201 0
GRP instead of NO: all nodes of group GRP − -

An initial velocity V0 in m/sec is defined for the nodes of a group GRP (or for individual nodes
NO). To be used in a dynamic time step analysis.

Example see: ase_nstr_pld_pile_crash.dat

Car collision: movs_car_collision.dat
Train interaction: movs_train_interaction.dat
Glass impact: pendulum_impact_test.dat

3-98 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.37 REIN – Specification for Determining Reinforcement

See also: DESI

REIN

Item Description Unit Default

MOD Design mode LT SECT

SECT Reinforcement in cut
BEAM Reinforcement in beam
SPAN Reinforcement in span
GLOB Reinforcement in all effective beams
TOTL Reinforcement in all beams
RMOD Reinforcement mode LT SING
SING Single calculation
SAVE Save as minimum reinforcement
SUPE Superposition with minimum reinforcement
ACCU Superposition with existing LCR reinforce-
ment
ACSA Comb. ACCU and SAVE
ACSU Comb. ACCU and SUPP
NEW New definition of the reinforcement distribu-
tion (for special cases only)
LCR Number of reinforcement distribution − 1
a negative value reinitializes all
ZGRP Grouping of prestressing tendons − 0
SFAC Factor for continuous reinforcement − 1.0
P6 Parameter for determining − *
P7 reinforcement − *
P8 (See notes) − *
P9 − *
P10 − *
P11 − 0.20
P12 − *
TITL Title of the design case LT24 -

Any number of types of reinforcement distribution can be stored in the database. Under number
LCR, the most recently calculated reinforcement for graphic depictions and for determinations
of strain is stored. LCR=0 is reserved for the minimum reinforcement. This makes it possible,
for instance, to design some load cases in advance and to prescribe their reinforcements locally

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-99

ASE | Input Description

or globally as defaults. The input value RMOD refers to the minimum and link reinforcement:

SING creates new LCR reinforcements using the given stored minimum reinforcement
SAVE ignores the stored minimum reinforcement and overwrites it with the current rein-
forcement.
SUPE uses the stored minimum reinforcement and overwrites it with the possibly higher
values of this run.
ACCU Superposition with existing LCR reinforcement
ACSA Combination from ACCU and SAVE
ACSU Combination from ACCU and SUPP

There is also a control flag CTRL REIN, defining if the reinforcements should be increased or
not. The latter to be used for the analysis of existing structures.

Mit BEW BMOD ACCU LFB nnn kann man bis zu 255 Bewehrungsfälle als vorhandene Be-
wehrung für die aktuelle Berechnung aktivieren, gespeichert wird unter der letzten angegeben
LFB-Nummer.

With REIN RMOD ACCU LCR nnn it is possible to add up to 255 reinforcement results as
active reinforcement of this run. It will be saved with the last defined LCR entry

SUPE cannot be used during an iteration, since then the maximum reinforcement for an itera-
tion step will not be able to be reduced. STAR2 therefore ignores a specification of SUPE, as
long as convergence has not been reached. AQB can update or superpose the reinforcements
at a later time: with REIN RMOD SUPE but without any DESI input.

A specification of BEAM, SPAN, GLOB or TOTL under MOD refers to interpolated sections or
sections with the same section number. For all connected ranges with the same section, the
maximum for the range multiplied with SFAC is incorporated as the minimum reinforcement.
The design is done separately in each case for each load, however, so that the user can
recognize the relevant load cases.

3-100 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

1 2 3 4

Section 1 Sect. 2 Section 1

SECT

BEAM

SPAN

GLOB

Figure 3.26: Distribution of reinforcements

As the existing reinforcement has a considerable impact on the shear design, AQB will perform
an intermediate superposition after the design for normal force and bending moments. How-
ever, use of minimum reinforcement in ultimate load design has also a detrimental effect on
the shear reinforcement, since the lever of internal forces is reduced. The user can take the
appropriate precautions by specifying a minimum lever arm in AQUA.

Since this latter effect is especially strong with tendons, AQBS can give special effect to the
latter in ultimate load design. This option is controlled with ZGRP:

ZGRP = 0 Tendons are considered with both their area and their prestressing. Normal
reinforcement is specified at the minimum percentage.
The relative loading capacity is found.
ZGRP > 0 Tendons are specified with their full prestressing, but with their area (stress
increase) only specified in so far as necessary. Normal reinforcement if in-
stalled only if the prestressing steel alone is not sufficient.
A required area of prestressing steel is determined.
ZGRP < 0 Tendons are specified with their prestressing, only specified in so far as nec-
essary, otherwise the same like ZGRP > 0.

If ZGRP < > 0 has been specified, the tendons are grouped into tendon groups. The group is
a whole number proportion which comes from dividing the identification number of the tendon

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-101

ASE | Input Description

by ZGRP. Group 0 is specified with its whole area, the upper group as needed. Any group
higher than 4 is assigned group 4. The group number of the tendons is independent of the
group number of the non-prestressed reinforcement.

Assume that tendons with the numbers 1, 21, 22 and 101 have been defined. With the appro-
priate inputs for ZGRP, the following division is obtained:

ZGRP 0 All tendons are minimum reinforcement

ZGRP 10 Tendon 1 is group 0 and minimum reinforcement
Tendons 21 and 22 are group 2 and extra
Tendon 101 is group 4 and extra
ZGRP 100 Tendons 1, 21 and 22 are minimum reinforcement
Tendon 101 is group 1, extra

An example of the effect can be found in Section 5.1.5.3.

Notes: Parameters for determining reinforcement

The following parameters are not to be changed by the user in general:

Default Typical
P7 Weighting factor, axial force 5 0.5 - 50
P8 Weighting factor moments -2 -2

When designing, the strain plane is iterated by the BFGS method. The required rein-
forcement is determined in the innermost loop according to the minimum of the squared
errors.

MN((N − N)2 + F1 · (MY − MY)2 + F2 · (MZ − MZ)2 )

F1 = P7 · (zm − zmn)P8

F2 = P7 · (ym − ymn)P8

The default value for P8 leads to the same dimensions for the errors. The value of
P7 has been determined empirically. With symmetrical reinforcement and tension it is
better to choose a smaller value, with multiple layers and compression a larger one. For
small maximum values of the reinforcement the value of P7 should be increased.

Default Typical
P9 Factor for reference point of strain 1.0 1.0
P10 Factor for reference point of moments 1.0 0.2-1.0

Lack of convergence in the design with biaxial loading can generally be attributed to the
factors no longer shaping the problem convexly, so that there are multiple solutions or
none. In these cases the user can increase the value of P7 or can vary the value of
P10 between 0.2 and 1.0, for individual sections. In most cases, however, problems are
caused by specifying the minimum reinforcement improper.

P11 Factor for preference outer reinforcement

3-102 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Reinforcement which is only one third of the lever arm, is allowed to be maximum one
third of the area of the outer reinforcement. P11 is the factor to control this. For biaxial
bending P11=1.0, for uniaxial bending P11=0.0

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-103

ASE | Input Description

3.38 DESI – Reinforced Concrete Design, Bending, Axial Force

See also: REIN, NSTR

DESI

Item Description Unit Default

STAT Load condition and code LT *

NO Save reinforcement only
SERV Serviceability loads
ULTI Ultimate loads
NONL Non-linear analysis combin.
ACCI Accidental combination
KSV Control for material of cross section − *
KSB Control for material of reinforcements − *
AM1 Minimum reinforcement for beams % *
AM2 Minimum reinforcement for columns % *
AM3 Minimum reinforcement % *
statically required cross section
AM4 Minimum reinforcement % *
depending on normal force
AMAX Maximum reinforcement %/ LT *
FIX the current reinforcements will be fixed as
maximum
SC1 Safety coefficient concrete bending − *
SC2 Safety coefficient concrete compression − *
SCS Safety coefficient concrete shear − *
SS1 Safety coefficient reinforcing steel − *
SS2 Safety coefficient structural steel − *
C1 Maximum compression o/ oo *
C2 Maximum centric compression o/ oo *
S1 Optimum tensile strain, see below o/ oo *
(= limit for symmetric reinforcements)
S2 Maximum tensile strain o/ oo *
Z1 Maximum effective compressive strain o/ oo *
of prestressing steel
Z2 Maximum effective tensional strain o/ oo *
of prestressing steel
SMOD Design mode shear LT *
Table continued on next page.

3-104 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Item Description Unit Default

NO No shear design
TVS Deductional shear stress / stress limit N/ mm2 *
MSCD Maximum tensile longitudinal stress N/ mm2 *
KTAU Shear design for plates −/ LT *
K1 not staggered for normal slabs (DIN 1045
17.5.5. equ. 14)
K2 not staggered for slabs with evenly dis-
tributed loading (DIN 1045 17.5.5. equ. 15)
K1S like K1, but staggered (DIN 1045 17.5.5. Ta-
ble 13 1a)
K2S like K2, but staggered
num coefficient k for equ. 4.18 EC2
0.0 no shear check
TTOL Tolerance for the limit values − 0.02
TANA Lower and upper limit for inclination of struts of shear − *
design (tan Θ = 1/cot Θ)
TANB − *
SCL Plasticity control for steel and composite sections − 3
1 No limits on steel stress
2 Outmost compressive yield stress is limited
3 Compressive stress is limited to the yield
value
4 Yield stress will be applied as limit in the
tensile and compressive region

Design may be performed for various safety concepts. When designing for ultimate load or
combinations with divided safety factors, the load factor must be contained in the internal forces
and moments. One way to accomplish this is with the COMB records.

With KSV and KSB will be controlled the material law. As the correct default is taken from
the INI-file selected with the design code NORM, it is only for very special cases that you may
enter:

EL linear elastic, but without tension if concrete

ELD linear elastic with added material safety factor from AQUA
SL serviceability without safety factors
SLD serviceability with added material safety factor from AQUA
UL ultimate design without safety factors from AQUA
ULD ultimate design with safety factors from AQUA
CAL Calculatoric mean values

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-105

ASE | Input Description

CALD Calculatoric mean values with safety factors from AQUA

PL plastic nominal without safety factors
PLD plastic design with material safety factors from AQUA

The safety factors referenced above refer to the values defined with the material in AQUA.
Without ”D” only the factors defined in the INI file or the explicitly defined values SC1 to SS2 of
the DESI record are applied. However the additional safety factor γ’ for high strength concrete
of DIN will be applied additionally. The printout will flag ”global safety factors”

With Option ”D” we have to distinguish between two different cases:

• If the values defined in DESI are < 1.0 or negative or SC1 is not equal SC2 (e.g. ACI or
odl DIN) or the design code has special provisions for that (SNIP), the safety factors are
multiplicative. Printed stresses contain only the safety factors of the materials.
• In all other cases the value from the material will be taken instead of the default value of
DESI. However if the safety factor is explicitly defined with DESI with a value > 1 the option
D will be deactivated with a warning. (Attention: has been changed Sept. 2008)

If a design without any safety factors is required, all saftey factors have to be specified as 1.0
which will then change the default for KSV/B to UL.

PL resp. PLD will modify for some design codes (DIN, EC, ACI) the stress strain law to a
constant equivalent stress block, i.e. the stress value and the strain range will be modified
according to the provisions of those codes.

With the special definition of SS1 NRIL the safety factors of the reinforcements will be set to
1.05 and 1.10 according to the provisions of the German ”Nachrechnungsrichtlinie”, also the
ordinates of those reinforcements will be reduced then by an offset of 20 resp. 10 mm.

The minimum reinforcements AM1 to AM4 are preset according to the design code (INI file)
and apply to all cross sections; they are input as a percentage of the section area.

The relevant value is the maximum of the minimum reinforcements:

- Absolute minimum reinforcement (AM1/AM2)

- Minimum reinforcement of statically required section
- Minimum reinforcement defined in cross section program AQUA
- Minimum reinforcement stored in the database

Note:

The statically determined portion of the forces and moments of prestressing is always deducted
when determining the external forces and moments. This contribution is found from the location
of the tendons and their tensile force.

AQB only: A specification of the bifurcation factor BETA in record BEAM is changed to addi-
tional moments according to DIN 1045 17.4.3 resp. Eurocode 4.3.5.6. resp. DIN 1045 neu
5.6.4. resp. OeNORM B 4700 2.4.3. or other design codes. The design will always generate
both bending axis. The output of the extra moments is given with the forces of the combina-
tions.

3-106 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Defaults for strain limits and safety coefficients depend on the selected design code and the
type of load combination. They may be specified in the INI-file of the design code. If SC1 and
SC2 are defined different (e.g. old DIN 1045, ACI), then the safety factors of the reinforcements
will be also interpolated if SS1 is equal to SC1.

The maximum strain depends on the stress-strain curve. The value of 2.2 is reduced for ex-
ample at the old DIN or high strength concrete automatically. The EN and the DIN suggest to
limit the strain also for the midpoint of compressive flanges. This option may be selected by
defining a value of C2 as positive (select teh control) or negative (disable the control).

The values Z1 and Z2 do not limit the range of possible strains, but the maximum corresponding
values are used as strain increments for the tension members in the section. This is necessary,
for instance, when designing with partial prestressing under DIN 4227 Part 2.

According to DIN 1045-1 8.2 (3) some bending structures should have a height of the com-
pressive zone not larger than 0.45 d, or 0.35 d for high strength concrete. If this is not fulfilled a
minimum shear link according to 13.1.1. (5) has to be provided. As the maximum compressive
strain is fixed (3.5 per mille), this is equivalent to the request that the steel strain has at least a
value of 4.278 or a higher value for C55 on.

Thus the control of this paragraph is easily performed via the steel strain. An equivalent for-
mulation is given in OENORM 4700, where it is requested that the steel should reach the yield
strength. As the old DIN 1045 had the more general formulation for the same ductile request,
that the compressive reinforcement is not allowed to be considered with a larger value than the
tensile reinforcement

Thus AQB provides symmetric reinforcements for all design codes when the steel strain does
not exceed the value of S1, fulfilling the request for ductility in that way.

This design operation is also suitable for non-reinforced sections. In that case the program
produces internal forces and moments which are in the same proportion to each other as the
external forces and moments. The safety factors SC1 and SC2 have to be defined dependent
on the design code. The program then shows the relative load carrying capacity and prints a
warning if this should fall below 1.0.

The shear design finds the lever of internal forces for all load cases with compression and
tension forces in the section, and finds the shear stress and shear reinforcement resulting from
shearing force and torsion. The shear stress limits are set automatically depending on SMOD
and the material. Deviating values for the shear stress limits can be defined within AQB with a
record STRE (under 4227 only) or TVS. Since in case of excess of the shear stress limits no
design more occurs, this can be exceeded onto own responsibility of the user with a tolerance.

For the reduction of the shear capacity for tensile members the normal stress σpc is limited to
the value MSCD. The default is selected with the mean tensile strength fctm .

Consideration of the shift of the envelope line of the tensile force (shift rule) depends upon
the CTRL option VM. The ratio Ved/Vrd,max and the value of the shift will be saved to the
database.

If a section is to be considered as a plate has already been defined with the section itself. The
definition of KTAU is thus only effective for those sections.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-107

ASE | Input Description

For sections with tendons, the bond stress for every tendon will be evaluated according to DIN
4227 chapter 13 as the increment in tendon force divided by the periphery and the length given
by BETA in record BEAM. (Use negative factors for bending members)

3-108 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.39 NSTR – Non-linear Stress and Strain

See also: REIN, DESI

NSTR

Item Description Unit Default

KMOD Nonlinearity for beam elements LT S0

(and truss and cable elements)
possible input - see manual AQB
- or S0 = beam+truss+cables material linear
S1,K1,KN... = beam+truss+cables nonlinear
KSV Selection of stress strain curve for LT SL
quad, beam, truss, cable and springs
KSB Stress strain curve for beam reinforcement LT KSV
(quad elements always use KSV inclusive
tension stiffening)
... further input for beam elements
- see AQB manual

Further possible input on NSTR you find in the AQB manual command NSTR.

Examples to nonlinear beams you find in the folder ase.dat..nonlinear_beam

With NSTR the kind of investigated material limit state is specified, in particular, serviceability
and ultimate limit state are distinguished, here. Depending on the choice, the appropriate
material working law (cf. AQUA manual, input records SSLA and SFLA) is processed for
evaluation of the material response.

Possible specifications for KSV are:

EL linear elastic, but without tension if concrete

ELD linear elastic with material safety factor
SL service nominal without material safety factor
SLD service design with material safety factor
UL ultimate nominal without material safety factor
ULD ultimate design with material safety factor
CAL Calculatoric mean values
CALD Calculatoric mean values with safety factors from AQUA
PL plastic nominal without material safety factor
PLD plastic design with material safety factor

Main usage without KMOD input (e.g. NSTR KSV SL) for:

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-109

ASE | Input Description

• nonlinear quad elements (require additional SYST...NMAT YES)

• nonlinear springs
• beam elements with fullplastic interaction (KSV PL/PLD)
• implicit beam hinges with spring work law (AQUA - SFLA)

Usage with KMOD input (e.g. NSTR KMOD K1 KSV ULD) for:

• nonlinear beam elements with internal AQB call

Detailed describtion of possibilities including example references see following chapter:

”Nonlinear Material Analysis in ASE”. For plastification number: see equation 2.45

3-110 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.40 Non-linear Material Analysis in ASE

Examples see -> Summary of example overviews

Non-linear material analyses can be activated or deactivated with different parameters:

SYST PROB NONL

activates a material non-linear analysis.
Using SYST PROB TH2, TH3B, TH3 additional geometric non-linear effects are
activated.
SYST ... NMAT YES
activates material non-linear effects for shell and volume elements:
for shells: concrete rule (AQUA-CONC)
steel yielding (AQUA-STEE) Plastification number: see equation 2.45
membranes (AQUA-NMAT-MEMB)
for volume elements: soil mechanical yielding criteria
(AQUA-NMAT-MOHR...)
GRP ... LINE
switches off non-linear effects of a group.
NSTR Without input of a record NSTR: same as NSTR S0.
NSTR S0
Beam, cable and truss elements are analyzed with a linear material behaviour.
Spring elements are analyzed with a non-linear spring work law if defined. The
non- linear spring effects GAP, CRAC, YIEL and MUE are taken into account in a
nonlinear analysis.
NSTR S1 or SN
Beam elements are analyzed non-linear via an internal AQB calculation, Cables,
truss and spring elements take into account all non linear effects.
Material safety factors see following table *1).
See example file aseaqb_1_column_cracked.dat
NSTR S1 KSV PL (or PLD):
For beam elements the internal forces and moments are limited in a simple way to
the full plastic values of the program AQUA (without internal AQB calculation). See
example file ase_nstr_pld.dat
On the safe side a code independant interaktion with an exponent 1.70 is used (2.0
is too unsafe). With CTRL BEAM V2 this default value of 1.70 can be changed, e.g.
CTRL BEAM V2 1.80
ƒ = [ (M/ MPL)1.70 + (N/ NPL)1.70 + (V/ VPL)1.70 ...] 1/ 1.7
With CTRL WARP 1 also full plastic warping values are taken into account and a
beam gets plastic deformations due to warping:
ƒ = [... + (MTp/ MTpPL)1.70 + (MTs/ MTsPL)1.70 + (Mb/ MbPL)1.70 ] 1/ 1.7
The total torsional moment Mt then has 3 parts (MT= MTp +MTs +MTn) :
- MTp primary torsional moment from Saint Venant shear stresses
- MTs secondary torsional moment (flange shear from warping longitudinal stresses)

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-111

ASE | Input Description

- MTn theory 2. order torsional moment from twisted normal stresses

Mb : bi-moment (from warping longitudinal stress - creates MTs at other sections)
Cable, truss and spring elements as described in NSTR S1”.

The following table lists all possible material non-linear effects which are available in ASE. It
shows also the essential inputs and possibilities for the activation or deactivation of different
effects. In an input only with SYST PROB NONL without further definitions the behaviour
”=standard” is active!

Elementtype NL effect material input activated in ASE: deactivated:

Beam elements AQUA-CONC - NSTR S1/SN *1) = standard
AQUA-STEE (full-plastic: - NSTR S0
AQUA-SSLA NSTR S1 KSV PLD) - GRP LINE
Cables + truss = standard
material stress- CONC/STEE/SSLA - NSTR S1/SN - NSTR S0
strain curves - GRP LINE
Cables
compress.failure = standard *2) - GRP LINE
Springelements
gap,crac,yiel,mue SPRI = standard - GRP LINE
Spring elements *3) AQUA-SARB and
spring stress- SPRI-MNO = standard - GRP LINE
strain curves
implicit beam hing AQUA-SARB
Spring elements *4) AQUA-SSLA and
material stress SPRI+AR = standard - GRP LINE
-strain curves
QUAD bedding
tension cut off AQUA-BMAT-CRAC = standard *5) - GRP LINE
or CRAC=9999
friction AQUA-BMAT-MUE = standard *6) - GRP LINE
QUAD elements AQUA-CONC
of concrete/steel AQUA-STEE - SYST...NMAT YES = standard *9)
*7) AQUA-SSLA *8) *9) - GRP LINE
Membrane elements AQUA-MAT- - SYST...NMAT YES = standard
NMAT MEMB *10) - GRP LINE
Volume elements AQUA-MAT... - SYST...NMAT YES = standard
BRIC NMAT MOHR... *11) - GRP LINE
Halfspace contact HASE-PLAS PMAX = standard *12) only SYST
LINE

*1) Important is the input of the material safety factor with NSTR...KSV: Using NSTR always
the stress-strain curves of the program AQUA are taken into account. In this case the material
safety factors are not used for KSV SL, UL, CAL. On the other hand the AQUA material safety
factors are multiplied for KSV SLD, ULD, CALD. In the first part of the ASE output the maximum

3-112 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

stresses for the materials are printed.

Due to different defaults in the programs AQB / STAR2 / ASE the items KSV and KSB should be
input. The usage of material safety factors for the stiffness determination (NSTR) is interpreted
differently by the specialists. For a ultimate limit check without further design the input ULD or
CALD is reasonable (without modifications of the material stress-strain curve in the program
AQUA). SL has to be used for calculations in the serviceability state.

Default for the material safety factors of non-linear analyses:

- With an input of a record NSTR:

default for KSV=ULD = stress-strain curve for the ultimate limit state
with the material safety factor (SCM) of the program AQUA
With that also the stiffness of linear elements is changed!
- Without an input of a record NSTR all elements are analyzed with the linear E modulus. So
a simple non-linear analysis will give the same displacements as a linear analysis (provided
that non-linear effects do not occur).

At the end of a non-linear ASE calculation a statistics is printed with the available non-linear
effects.

*2) Cables which are loaded in the transverse direction (e.g. by dead load) never fail due to
compression in a geometrical non-linear analysis TH3 with the default, because the inner cable
sag produces always a tensile force (see CTRL CABL). For the input SYST PROB NONL or
with CTRL CABL 0, cables cannot get an inner cable sag and fail due to pressure load!

*3) Springs can be defined with a non-linear spring stress-strain curve in the program AQUA.
Please refer to example a1_spring_overview.dat

*4) For soil analysis (e.g. tunnel calculations) springs can be defined also via an effective area
AR and a material number. Then ASE calculates a non-linear spring characteristic curve by
using the material stress-strain curve SSLA of the program AQUA.

*5) Without further input in program AQUA a QUAD bedding is preset with CRAC=0, i.e. QUAD
elements can have a tension cut off. See example ase_bed_uplift.dat

*6) Without further input in program AQUA no friction coefficient MUE is preset, i.e. horizontal
forces can be transferred without limitation, if the element is not cracked (no tension cut off).

*7) QUAD elements with simple MAT input are analyzed linearly. Only QUAD elements of
CONCRETE or STEEL can be analyzed non-linearly with the input SYST...NMAT YES .

*8) Also for shell elements, ASE uses the concrete stress-strain curve of AQUA. The concrete
tensile strength can be changed temporarily with CTRL CONC V3 V4.

*9) Often only non-linear springs or bedding should be taken into account in a non-linear anal-
ysis. Therefore the material non-linear QUAD elements are deactivated in the default (default
SYST ... NMAT=NO). If required, they have to be activated explicitly with SYST ... NMAT YES.

*10) A membrane failure due to pressure must be activated via AQUA... NMAT MEMB and
ASE...SYST NMAT YES.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-113

ASE | Input Description

*11) For volume elements (BRIC) various soil-mechanical material rules can be defined in
AQUA...NMAT MOHR.... Example see ase14_tunnel_3d.dat. BRIC elements with CON-
CRETE see bric_concrete.dat or STEEL see bric_steel_van_mise.dat

*12) Details see program HASE.

3-114 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

3.41 ECHO – Output Control

See also: CTRL, SYST, GRP

ECHO

Item Description Unit Default

OPT A literal from the following list: LT *

NODE Nodal values
GRP Group parameters
MAT Material parameters
ELEM Element values
LOAD Loads
DISP Displacements
FORC Internal forces and moments
SPRI Spring and cable results (additiv)
NOST Internal forces and moments at the nodes
BEDD Foundation stresses
REAC Support reactions
LINE Distributed support reactions
PLAB Statistics T-beam components
EIGE Eigenvalues
STEP NSTR print every VAL iterations
RESI Residual forces during iteration. RESI=7
writes 90000...Iterationssteps
ERIN Error estimates
STAT Statistics + group + plots
NNR Nodal displacement during iterations
ENR Element stresses during iteration
LSUM Sum of the loads, statistics, storey
STRG Tendon group stresses
BDEF Local beam deformations
STOR Database memory location
FULL All the above options, but only print the first
20 lines if lines>200
(gives overview over possible tables)
STRE, NSTR, DESI, REIN, SHEA, LC, BSEC,
CRAC, B2T, USEP: See manual for the program
AQB
Table continued on next page.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-115

ASE | Input Description

Item Description Unit Default

VAL Output extent −/ LT *

OFF No calculation / output
NO No output
YES Regular output
FULL Extensive output
EXTR Extreme output
0-7 See output description for BRIC

3-116 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Input Description | ASE

Default:

ECHO LOAD YES

ECHO DISP,FORC,REAC,NOST,BEDD,BDEF NO
as well as NO for NODE and MAT and YES for all other

for small beam systems < 1000 nodes additionally:

ECHO LOAD FULL
ECHO DISP,FORC,NOST,BEDD NO
ECHO REAC YES

for very small beam systems < 100 nodes additionally:

ECHO DISP,FORC YES

The record name ECHO should be repeated in every record to avoid confusion with similar
record names. See chapter 4 for the effect of ECHO.

ECHO SPRI activates only the result print of springs and cables. This is often useful in nonlin-
ear analysis to focus on these elements. ECHO FORC also activates this print.

For the check of the iteration ECHO NNR xxx prints the node displacements of the node xxx
after each iteration (10 nodes maximum). Only the displacement component of the current
analysis step is output (without primary load case component). ECHO ENR is implemented so
far only for cables.

With ECHO BDEF EXTR a storage of the local beam deformations can be enforced, with
ECHO BDEF 7 also for CSM usage inclusive primary loadcase. An outprint in ASE is not
implemented, please use WINGRAF for this. Using primary loadcases the local beam defor-
mations are hard to interprete. In case an element is activated later in a deformed system, the
start displacements are missing. We recommend to always use the nodal deformations. You
can also plot them in the skew coordinate system of beams, e.g. nodal displacementes local
z!

The strain energy of the groups is only printed and stored with both input ECHO STAT FULL
and ECHO GRP FULL.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-117

ASE | Input Description

3-118 SOFiSTiK 2025

 Bibliography | ASE

Bibliography

[1] C. Katz and J. Stieda. Praktische FE-Berechnungen mit Plattenbalken. Bauinformatik 1,

1992.
[2] W. Wunderlich, G. Kiener, and W. Ostermann. Modellierung und Berechnung von Deck-
enplatten mit Unterzügen. Bauingenieur, 1994.
[3] J. Bellmann. Vorgespannte schiefwinklige Plattenbalkenbrücke. 7. SOFiSTiK Seminar,
1994.
[4] C. Katz. Neues zu Plattenbalken. 7. SOFiSTiK Seminar, 1994.
[5] C. Katz. Berechnung von allgemeinen Pfahlwerken. Bauingenieur 61 563-568, 1986.
[6] T.J.R. Hughes and T.E. Tezduyar. Finite Elements Based Upon Mindlin Plate Theory
With Particular Reference to the Four-Node Bilinear Isoparametric Element. Journal of
Applied Mechanics, 48/3, 1981, pp. 587–596.
[7] A. Tessler and T.J.R. Hughes. An improved Treatment of Transverse Shear in the Mindlin-
Type Four-Node Quadrilateral Element. Computer Methods in Applied Mechanics and
Engineering 39, 1983, pp. 311–335.
[8] M.A. Crisfield. A Quadratic Mindlin Element Using Shear Constraints. Computers &
Structures, Vol. 18, 833-852, 1984.
[9] Timoshenko and Woinowsky-Krieger. Theory of Plates and Shells. MacGraw-Hill, New-
York, 1959.
[10] O.C. Zienkiewicz. Methode der finiten Elemente, 2.Auflage. Hanser Verlag München,
1984.
[11] Stempniewski and Eibl. Finite Elemente im Stahlbeton. Betonkalender 1993-Teil 1 S.
249., 1993.
[12] P.H. Feenstra and R. De Borst. Aspects of robust computational modeling for plain and
reinforced concrete. Heron Volume 38 No.4, 1993.
[13] P. Schiessel. Grundlagen der Neuregelung zur Beschränkung der Rissbreite. Heft 400
DAfStb, 1994.
[14] xx. Erläuterungen zu DIN 1045-1. Heft 525 DAfStb September, 2003.
[15] K. Zilch and A. Rogge. Bemessung von Stahlbeton- und Spannbetonbauteilen im
Brücken- und Hochbau. Betonkalender 2, 2004.
[16] J. Bellmann and J. Rötzer. Beispiele zur Bemessung nach DIN 1045-1, Müllbunkerwand.
DBV: Band2: Ingenieurbau Beispiel 15, 2003.
[17] xx. mit Berichtigung 1, Juli 2002 z.B. in [2]. DIN 1045-1 Ausgabe Juli 2001, 2002.
[18] W. Schneider. Zustand II Berechnungen in der Praxis (Beitrag). SOFiSTiK Seminar
Leipzig, 2003.
[19] J. Bellmann. Membranes â€âCœ From Formfinding to Cutting Pattern. Structural
Membranes conference on textile composites and inflatable structures, 2003.
[20] J. Bellmann. Dynamic behaviour of inflatable membranes for impact and wind loading.
Structural Membranes conference on textile composites and inflatable structures, 2005.
[21] J. Bellmann. Air volume elements for distribution of pressure in air cushion membranes.
Structural Membranes conference on textile composites and inflatable structures, 2011.
[22] J. Bellmann. Experience on the implementation of a nonlinear material model for mem-
brane fabrics in a finite element program. Structural Membranes conference on textile
composites and inflatable structures, 2013.
[23] J. Bellmann. Active bending starting on curved architectural shape. Structural Mem-
branes conference on textile composites and inflatable structures, 2017.

SOFiSTiK 2025 3-119

ASE | Bibliography

[24] K.J. Bathe and E.N. Dvorkin. A Four-Node Plate Bending Element Based on
Mindlin/Reissner Plate Theory and a Mixed Interpolation. Int.Journal.f.Numerical Meth.
Engineering Vol.21 367-383, 1985.
[25] T.J.R. Hughes and E. Hinton. Finite Elements for Plate and Shell Structures. Pineridge
Press International, Swansea, 1986.
[26] R.L. Taylor, P.J. Beresford, and E.L. Wilson. A Non-Conforming Element for Stress Anal-
ysis. International Journal for Numerical Methods in Engineering, Vol. 10:1211-1219,
1976.
[27] Timothy A. Davis. LDL: a consise sparse Cholesky factorization package. http://www.
cise.ufl.edu/research/sparse/ldl. 2003-2012.

3-120 SOFiSTiK 2025